DataView User and Administrator Guide

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "DataView User and Administrator Guide"

Transcription

1 Tioli Netcool Performance Manager 1.3 Wireline Component (Netcool/Proiso 5.2) Document Reision R2E1 DataView User and Administrator Guide

2 Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 233. Copyright IBM Corporation 1997, US Goernment Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

3 Contents About this information ii Intended audience ii The Netcool/Proiso product suite ii What this information contains iii Chapter 1. Oeriew DataView users DataView functionality User profiles Thresholds Data aggregation Chapter 2. Understanding your data.. 9 Tables Group Summary Table Resource Threshold Table Resource Summary Table Composite Resource Summary Table Inentory Summary Table Resource Planning Table Rank Variation Table Calender Table Property History Table Threshold History Table Matrix Table Charts Real-Time Charts Resource Baseline Charts Distribution Charts Time Series Charts DataView report types TopN and BottomN reports Trending and forecasting reports Search reports Diagnostic reports Chapter 3. Viewing performance results 51 Connecting to the serer and logging in Defined Resource Views Viewing network performance results Selecting KPI iews Selecting the date and period for the currently iewed report Sorting results The breadcrumb trail Exporting results to PDF CSV export format Exporting results to CSV format Getting support from the portal Customizing your KPI iews Setting your preferred KPI iew Working with thresholds Adanced report functionality User-editable RST reports Working with real-time charts Changing time series granularity Viewing a Search report Viewing a Diagnostic report Diagnostic report drill downs Scheduled Reports Scheduling a report Verifying scheduled reports before deliery Viewing consolidated reports Troubleshooting the Scheduler Changing your address Chapter 4. Administration tasks Logging in to the console Administering the serer Stopping and starting the application serer.. 70 Port assignments Viewing the application serer profile Administering users, roles, and groups Default user groups and roles Creating a Tioli Integrated Portal user Assigning a Tioli Netcool Performance Manager role to a user Create multiple users Managing users Managing groups User Preference Management Selecting a user in User Preference Management 86 Resource grouping Assigning access to resource groups Editing user priileges User Profile Management Assigning global threshold types to user profiles 92 Limiting scheduled tasks for user profiles Configure DataView settings Configuring the default time series granularity settings for the system Configure a contact address Configuring the DataView Scheduler Configuring the PDF serer Exporting an SSL certificate to the Corda PDF serer Allow a user to change their address Configuring trace and logging Configuring database details The configure command Moing DataView content between Tioli Netcool Performance Manager instances The export command The import command Migrating SilerStream content to the Tioli Integrated Portal The migrate command SilerStream page conersion The information command The patch command Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2010 iii

4 Chapter 5. Deploying reports Starting DataMart Deploying reports by using the Resource Editor 109 Remoing preiously deployed reports by using the Resource Editor Accessing Resource Manager Deploying reports by using Resource Manager Deploy reports against a group Deploy reports against grouping rules Deploy all reports according to grouping rules 113 Chapter 6. Configuring reports Creating or modifying reporters Working with reporter parameters Core reporter parameters Parameters specific to Diagnostic reports Parameters specific to Search reports Editing mediator parameters in a reporter Common mediator parameters Selecting or remoing metrics Selecting a suppression metric Metric data format Formatting metric data Selecting statistics Displaying statistics in a table heading Editing metric and statistic labels Properties Selection Supported ariables Busy hour units Drill down options Configuring drill downs from an RST to a composite subelement Configuring the display of threshold information Set chart error threshold percentage Set chart warning threshold percentage Including CSV export format Setting report column order in Trouble Ticket reports Table sorting Adding a hyperlink image Adding upscale naigation links Adding downscale naigation links Restricting time naigation Setting time series granularity Configuring AGTS and GTS reports for High Performance Data Acquisition Resource Summary Table display filters Remoing the resource count in GST reports 153 Adding a sum row Customizing user information about reports Restricting customer access to reports Display text or links in results Displaying report summary information Choosing an alternate page for suppressed reports Configuring how reports are deployed Adding a comment Working with charts Using charts in reports X-axis labeling i IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide Formatting a chart legend Extending the chart area Chart titles Oerriding the footer label defined in a chart style Choosing a chart style Chapter 7. Configuring chart styles 167 Creating chart styles Setting the preiew chart size Editing chart report parameters Accessing report parameters Choosing a chart type Formatting series lines Formatting series symbols Formatting baseline, properties, percentiles, and network analysis displays Formatting threshold warnings Formatting the baseline deiation display Editing chart appearance parameters Accessing appearance parameters Editing foreground and background colors Accessing and editing 3D parameters Editing chart axes parameters Accessing axes parameters Editing the axes orientation parameter Editing general axes properties Editing the grid style Formatting text Accessing and editing chart area parameters Chart parameters for legends, headers, and footers 182 Accessing and editing legend, header, and footer chart parameters Editing legend, header, and footer chart parameters Placing chart headers, footers, and legends Editing footer labels Appendix A. Configuring specific reports Composite Resource Summary Table reports Configuring Composite Resource Summary Table reports Configuring trending and forecasting reports Configuring the Resource Planning Table Configuring Trending and Forecasting Time Series reports Specifying the upgrade condition The RPT report algorithm Matrix Table reports Configuring Matrix Table reports: Model Configuring Matrix Table reports: Model Adding trendlines to time series Real-time charts Editing real-time parameters Enabling real-time chart access from a static chart Completing a standalone real-time chart Multi-Resource Time Series charts Limitations on multi-resource reports

5 Multi-resource time series and the resource list 200 Multi-resource charts with a single resource Accessing the multi-resource options Filtering by family or property Filtering by composite subelement (CSEs) Selecting resources for multi-resource time series 203 Setting the report period and period offset Setting sliding daily time series Additional Multi-Resource Time Series parameters Support for user-editable properties Adding support for editing resource names Adding support to control grouping Adding support to edit any property Creating a Search report Creating a Diagnostic report Appendix B. DataView style sheets 213 Basic style sheets Creating or customizing style sheets Appendix C. Creating a reporter set 215 Reporter sets The Reporter Set Wizard Reporter sets and templates Accessing the reporter set wizard Creating a reporter set by using the wizard Choosing a template Naming the reporter set Selecting reporter set metrics Labeling the metrics Selecting chart styles Selecting statistics Labeling statistics Entering report parameters Entering reporter descriptions Listing the reporters Appendix D. Troubleshooting real-time charts Notices Trademarks Additional copyright notices Index Contents

6 i IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

7 About this information Intended audience IBM Tioli Netcool Performance Manager is a bundled product consisting of two main components. A wireline component (formerly Tioli Netcool/Proiso), and a wireless component (formerly Tioli Netcool Performance Manager for Wireless). The IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide describes how to use and administer the DataView component of Netcool/Proiso. This publication is intended for: Users who access the portal and browse the data presented in iews and reports. For example, network operations centers. Administrators who assign permissions, create groups, and associate users with reports. Adanced users or content designers who work with style sheets and reporters to extend the capabilities of Netcool Proiso technology packs. The Netcool/Proiso product suite Netcool/Proiso is made up of the following components: Netcool/Proiso DataMart is a set of management, configuration, and troubleshooting GUIs that the Netcool/Proiso System Administrator uses to define policies and configuration, as well as erify and troubleshoot operations. Netcool/Proiso DataLoad proides flexible, distributed data collection and data import of SNMP and non-snmp data to a centralized database. Netcool/Proiso DataChannel aggregates the data collected through Netcool/Proiso DataLoad for use by the Netcool/Proiso DataView reporting functions. It also processes online calculations and detects real-time threshold iolations. Netcool/Proiso DataView is a reliable application serer for on-demand, web-based network reports. Netcool/Proiso Technology Packs extend the Netcool/Proiso system with serice-ready reports for network operations, business deelopment, and customer iewing. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2010 ii

8 The following figure shows the different Netcool/Proiso modules. Netcool/Proiso documentations consists of the following: Release notes Configuration recommendations User guides Technical notes Online help The documentation is aailable for iewing and downloading on the infocenter at com.ibm.netcool_pm.doc/welcome_tnpm.htm. What this information contains This publication contains the following sections: Chapter 1, Oeriew Intended for all audiences, proides oeriew of Netcool/Proiso DataView. Chapter 2, Understanding your data Intended for content designers and users, explains all supported reports, with configuration and iewing guidelines. Chapter 3, Viewing performance results Intended for users, explains how to iew and work with reports on the portal. Chapter 4, Administration tasks Intended for Netcool/Proiso administrators, explains how to perform arious administratie tasks such applying security policies, associating users with reports, assigning user priileges, and so on iii IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

9 Chapter 5, Deploying reports Intended for Netcool/Proiso administrators, explains how to deploy configured and tested reports for display on the portal. Chapter 6, Configuring reports Intended for content designers, explains in detail how to configure DataView reports. Chapter 7, Configuring chart styles Intended for content designers, explains all supported charts, with configuration and iewing guidelines. Appendix A, Configuring specific reports Intended for content designers, explains how to configure specific types of Netcool/Proiso DataView reports in detail. Appendix B, DataView style sheets Intended for content designers, explains how to create new style sheets. Appendix C Creating a reporter set Intended for content designers, explains how to use the Reporter Set Wizard to create a reporter set. Appendix D, Troubleshooting real-time charts Intended for Netcool/Proiso administrators, describes how to restore the proper operation of real-time charts after CNS or CMGR hae been restarted. About this information ix

10 x IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

11 Chapter 1. Oeriew DataView users The DataView component is a framework for configuring a wide ariety of Key Performance Indicator (KPI) iews and reports. Network resource performance data is generated and displayed on the portal for network serice proiders and their customers. This summary explains how DataView is used: Users access DataView data from a web portal. Depending on their permissions, users can set parameters, see data from different time periods, and drill up and down through resources. Administrators associate users with reports, and assign permissions and properties and deploy iews and reports. Content designers, working from style sheets proided in technology packs, configure, and test reports by using the DataView framework. DataView iews and reports are configurable and support a wide-ariety of parameters and features. The emphasis is on reuse, modularity, ease of use, flexibility, and customization. The DataView component is used by content designers, administrators, and users. Content designers Content designers use the DataView component to create or modify reports by completing the following steps: Optional: Create or modify a style sheet. Not to be confused with a Cascading Style Sheet (CSS), DataView style sheets proide the underpinnings for the form and content of DataView reports. DataView style sheets are typically deliered in a Netcool/Proiso technology pack, although style sheets can be modified or created by customers and IBM Professional Serices. Create a reporter that is deried from a style sheet. A reporter is the framework of a report and contains the parameters necessary to configure a report. Typical parameters are metric formulas, drill-down links, labels, titles, and so on. Reporters are typically deliered in a technology pack and are accessed through Define Resource Groups. Configure a reporter to create a specific instance of a report. Administrators Netcool/Proiso administrators use the DataView and DataMart components to do the following: Associate users with reports. Establish security settings for users. Deploy reports on the portal. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

12 Users DataView functionality Users use the DataView component to see and work with data on a portal. The DataView component allows users to see network data that has been collected, aggregated, and stored in the database by other Netcool/Proiso components. Using predefined DataView queries and reporters proided in technology packs, or created by the customer, content designers use the DataView toolkit to create reports for users to see on a portal powered by the DataView application serer. A DataView report is a collection of DataView charts or tables that are displayed in a single page on a web browser. Charts and tables present the information you request from a specific, predefined query, and are typically formatted specifically for that query. In addition, you can export report data in comma-separated alues (CSV) format. DataView results, and their corresponding reports, can be grouped into the following categories: Single Group Shows data for a single group of network resources. Group Time Series (Table/Chart) Group Top/BottomN (Table/Chart) Group Ratio (Table/Chart) Multiple Group Shows data for a set of subgroups (children) within a single group of network resources (parent). Group Summary (Table) Group Top/BottomN (Table/Chart) Group Ratio (Table/Chart) Single Resource Shows data for a single subelement. Resource Time Series (Chart) Resource Top/BottomN (Table/Chart) Resource Ratio (Table/Chart) Resource Baseline (Chart) Multiple Resource Shows data for a set of subelements within or below a single group. Composite Resource Summary (Table) Resource Summary (Table) Resource Threshold (Table) Resource Top/BottomN (Table/Chart) Rank Variation (Table/Chart) Resource Distribution (Chart) Resource Ratio (Table/Chart) Resource Planning (Table) Time Series (Chart) Miscellaneous Shows network data that does not fit neatly into any of the preious categories. Calendar (Table) 2 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

13 Property History (Table) Threshold History (Table) SNMP (Table) Search Diagnostics report User profiles User profiles are defined for each of the different requirements and expectations for Netcool/Proiso users. Different audiences hae different requirements and expectations when iewing DataView results: Serice proider network operations (NOC) staff use Netcool/Proiso reports to check the status of the network during a specific time period. Customers use Netcool/Proiso reports to check their quality of serice (SLA). Serice proider decision-makers (for example Marketing or Sales) use Netcool/Proiso reports the same way as a customer. In addition, they can check warnings about the risks of missing the SLA at the end of the SLA period. They can also proactiely monitor the SLA for potential problems. The reports that content designers create depend on the audience, for example a content designer can create the following reports: A NOC GST for the serice proider operations iewer A Proactie SLA GST for the decision-making iewer An SLA GST for the customer DataView proides three user profiles to correspond to the three types of iewing audiences. The three iewer profiles include: NOC for serice proider network operators. NOC users can see SLA and PSLA reports, as well as NOC reports, and can change profiles on the portal while iewing reports. SLA for customers SLA users can see only SLA reports. SLA reports indicate the duration for which a threshold alue is exceeded. This duration is accrued until the end of the SLA period. Proactie SLA (PSLA) for decision makers. PSLA users can see PSLA reports and SLA reports. PSLA reports proide information that can warn the internal serice proider decision maker that a risk exists for iolating the SLA, before the SLA period expires. This information enables the serice proider to proactiely manage the SLA. Viewer profiles are set by the Netcool/Proiso administrator. The following examples show reports for the three different types of user profile: Chapter 1. Oeriew 3

14 NOC Report The following figure shows a GST report for a user with a NOC profile. SLA (Customer) Report The following figure shows the same GST for a iewer with an SLA profile. Proactie SLA Report The following figure shows the GST report when a PSLA profile is applied to the iewer. 4 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

15 Thresholds A threshold is a alue that is compared against metrics to determine if the metrics exceed or drop below a specific constraint. Ealuating data against thresholds lets you see only those resources with releant data in the following reports: Group Summary Table (GST) Resource Oer Threshold Table (RTT) Time Series Access priileges in user profiles determine the types of thresholds the user sees in the GST, RTT, and time series reports. Resource and group thresholds Threshold report capabilities exist at both the resource and group leels: Resource thresholds are created and modified by using the DataMart Resource Editor GUI, or the resmgr command, and stored in the database. The DataChannel component uses these threshold alues to compute threshold iolations and to generate trap information about iolations. The information is stored in the database and is used by DataView for reports that are specific to resources. For example, in a GST report, threshold information might indicate the number of iolations per group for each threshold type. Group thresholds are created and modified on a per-formula basis within the GST reporter parameters. The content designer specifies the following alues: Critical and warning thresholds The time span for which the threshold is alid The metrics and statistics for which the threshold alues apply The user profiles that can see the thresholds in the report The reporter to drill down to if the threshold is iolated Types of thresholds The following types of thresholds are supported: Chapter 1. Oeriew 5

16 Burst threshold Ignores the natural network bursts by ealuating how long in a row the iolations occurred per resource. Burst thresholds can be set and reset multiple times. Period threshold Inoles the concept of accumulated duration for which the threshold is iolated. This duration is accumulated until the end of the SLA period. Period thresholds, once iolated, are not reset until the end of the period. Risk A subset of a period threshold, typically highlights resource statistics in a GST that exceed or fall short of configured threshold alues. Baseline Proides a iew into resource behaior outside the normal range. Unlike burst, there is not a single threshold leel to consider when determining duration. The duration determination scheme considers arying threshold leels. Unlike burst, period, and risk thresholds, you do not statically define the baseline. The baseline dynamically adapts to historical data. Thresholds and user profiles The content designer grants user profiles access priileges to the different types of thresholds. These priileges determine which types of thresholds are aailable to users who belong to a particular profile. These priileges can be disabled for an indiidual report through reporter parameter settings. The content designer enables the display of threshold information in the GST, RTT, and time series reports by granting global access to threshold types and by editing reporter parameters. This table shows the threshold information typically required by each type of audience. Audience User Profile Burst Baseline Period Risk Threshold Violation Serice Proider NOC Yes Yes Yes No Customer SLA No Yes Yes No Decisionmaker PSLA No Yes Yes Yes Data aggregation Related tasks Assigning global threshold types to user profiles on page 92 Data aggregation is the process where raw data is gathered and expressed in a summary form for statistical analysis. For example, raw data can be aggregated oer a gien time period to proide statistics such as aerage, minimum, maximum, sum, and count. After the data is aggregated and written to a report, you can analyze the aggregated data to gain insights about particular resources or resource groups. There are two types of data aggregation: Time aggregation All data points for a single resource oer a specified time period. 6 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

17 Spatial aggregation All data points for a group of resources oer a specified time period. Time interals for data collection and aggregation Data is collected and presented in a report within the context of arious time interals: Reporting period The period oer which data is collected for presentation in a report. For example, a resource summary table might contain data collected for a particular network deice oer a period of one day. A reporting period can include aggregated data points or raw data (data that has not been aggregated). Supported reporting periods are Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, Yearly, and 14-monthly. Granularity The period oer which data points for a gien resource or set of resources are collected for aggregation. For example, if you want to find the aerage of the data points for a gien resource collected oer a 5 minute period, the granularity is 5 minutes. Granularity can range from 1 minute to one month, depending on the reporting period and report type. DataView aggregates data dynamically for a granularity of less than a day. DataChannel aggregates data for larger granularity alues. Polling period The time duration that determines how often resources are sampled for data. For example, a group of resources might be polled eery 5 minutes, meaning that a data point for each resource is generated eery 5 minutes. Polling period and granularity are both factors in the result of a spatial aggregation. For example, suppose you want to find the aerage of a set of data points collected for a group of deices oer a 10 minute period (the granularity). If the polling period is also 10 minutes, the result is the aerage of single data points collected for each deice. But if the polling period is 5 minutes, each deice is sampled twice within the 10 minute granularity period. The aggregated result is the aerage of all collected data points, the single data points collected for each resource during the first polling period plus the single data points collected during the second polling period. This table shows the granularity supported for a gien reporting period and report type. Report Day Week Month Quarter Year Sliding 14 Month GST 1 Day 1 Week 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month RTT 1 Day 1 Week 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month RST 1 Day 1 Week 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month Proactie 1 Day 1 Week 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month RST Proactie 1 Day 1 Week 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month RTT TopN 1 Day 1 Week 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month Chapter 1. Oeriew 7

18 Report Day Week Month Quarter Year Line Chart Raw 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour Time Series Table Summary Raw 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour Baseline Raw 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour Rank Variation Raw 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 Hours, 1 Day Raw 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 Minutes, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 Hours, 1 Day Raw 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 Minutes, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 Hours, 1 Day 5, 10, 15, 30 Minutes, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week 5, 10, 15, 30 Minutes, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week 1 Day, 1 Week 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Day, 1 Week Not supported 1 Day 1 Week 1 Month Not supported 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month Sliding 14 Month 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month 1 Month 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Pie Chart 1 Day 1 Week 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month 1 Month Daily and weekly group time series charts do not support raw data. Adanced group time series charts are restricted to a granularity of one week or less. With monthly reporting periods, Line Charts and Time Series Table Summaries can only be assigned a granularity of 5, 10, 15, or 30 minutes. For information about changing time series granularity from the portal, see Changing time series granularity on page 60. Data storage Data is written to the Netcool/Proiso database as follows: Raw (not aggregated) data is written to the database once per hour. Aggregated data is written to the database once per hour. Near real-time (NRT) data is raw data collected since the last time data was last written to the database. Since data is written to the database once an hour, NRT data can be collected for up to an hour. Related concepts Time Series Charts on page 36 8 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

19 Chapter 2. Understanding your data Tables Information can be gathered and filtered in the different types of iews and reports. Customized tables and charts present the information clearly. Your data can be displayed in arious table types. Group Summary Table Group Summary Tables (GSTs) proide the most summarized information about resource groups. GSTs proide an oeriew of the behaior of multiple groups of resources compared to a maximum of 10 metrics. As with all reports that support thresholds, threshold information in a GST differs for each user profile associated with the report (NOC, SLA, and Proactie SLA). On the portal, GST reports proide a starting point for report naigation. Users can drill down to additional, more detailed reports by clicking the links proided in the Group Name and threshold (Burst and Period) columns, if drill-down reports were specified in the reporter parameters. When the GST report is configured, the Group Name drill-down is typically set to another GST or a Resource Summary Table (RST), while threshold drill downs typically link to a Resource Threshold Table (RTT). Note: When drilling down from a GST report to an RST report, the RST might not list the same number of resources indicated in the GST. A GST indicates the number of resources oer the entire reporting period. An RST indicates the number of resources at the time the report is generated. A GST report can display the following information: Spatial aggregations in the form of statistics. The number of resources within a group that hae exceeded their threshold (set within the reporter parameters). The cell of the iolating threshold is colored red if the number of iolations in the group is higher compared to the size of the group. The calculation is defined in the reporter parameters. The number of resources within a group that are at risk of iolating their SLA threshold by the end of the reporting period. Multi-serice information about the same page. Sampling quality for the report when the quality statistic is displayed. (The number of actual samples receied during the reporting period compared to the expected number of measurements.) Violations for any of the following reporting periods: Daily Weekly Monthly Quarterly Yearly Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

20 14-Monthly The Complex Metric Engine (CME) computes the number of iolations for Daily, Weekly, and Monthly periods, and the GST displays the number of iolations. With Quarterly, Yearly, and 14-Monthly periods, DataView sums up the number of iolations in each month of the period. Content designers note the following: The GST displays group information for up to six metrics per group. For each metric, group threshold iolation information can also be displayed. The threshold iolation displayed for the metric/group pair is dependent on the following user profiles, which are configurable: Network Operations Center Burst and period thresholds are displayed. Serice Leel Agreement Period threshold is displayed. Proactie Serice Leel Agreement Period and risk thresholds are displayed. Note: All threshold iolation information displayed can be enabled/disabled on a metric/profile basis. GST reports support the paging and sorting of displayed data. A GST has reporter drill down capabilities on the group name and threshold iolation, per metric. The content designer can specify a reporter to be generated based on the position in the group hierarchy. If a reporter is specified for the parameter drilldown.leaf.reporter, then that reporter is generated when drilling down to a leaf group (that is, a group with no subgroups). Otherwise, the same reporter is generated for the subgroup selected. If a reporter is specified for the parameter drilldown.reporter, then that reporter is generated when drilling down regardless of the position in the hierarchy. If both parameters are specified, then the strategy for the leaf reporter is used. The GST proides the formatas parameter. There is no corresponding chart for the GST. Only the table is aailable. The GST uses mediator PVRcGroupSummaryMediator. NOC GST report A NOC GST report contains two threshold columns, burst and period, for each metric. Burst column The number of resources that experience a burst threshold iolation. You can drill down to a corresponding RTT to see which resources are in burst threshold iolation and see the accumulated time represented by the spikes, for the reporting period. Period column The number of resources experiencing a period threshold iolation. Period thresholds are defined according to a time period (day, week, month). Only a GST based on the same period shows any iolations that occur. A GST based on a period that differs from the period threshold does not show iolations. If a period threshold is defined on a monthly basis (meaning 10 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

21 that the iolation time is accumulated across the month) and a GST is based on a weekly period; the GST displays a null alue (0) in the Period column. SLA GST report An SLA GST report contains one period threshold column for each metric. The period column indicates the number of resources experiencing a period threshold iolation. Proactie SLA GST report A Proactie SLA GST report contains two threshold columns, period and risk, for each metric. Period The number of resources experiencing a period threshold iolation. Risk The number of resources experiencing a risk for threshold period iolation. Multi-Serice GST reports You can display different GSTs (as well as RSTs) on the same page. Each GST reports on a different type of subelement and on different metrics. Example For example, if you are configuring reports based on the Netcool/Proiso IP VPN Technology Pack, you can display multiple GSTs to report the data collected on an IP VPN. A secure VPN is a combination of tunneling, encryption, authentication, access control, and auditing technologies/serices used to transport traffic oer the Internet or any insecure network using the TCP/IP protocol. Network-based VPNs route by using Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) and Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routing protocols such that the edge routers of a proider set up MPLS irtual circuits that carry traffic from arious sites, the Internet itself, and other carrier networks. Note: Paging and filtering are not supported when multiple tables are displayed in one report. MPLS-equipped networks use MPLS-aware deices known as label edge routers (LERs), positioned at the edges of the network. These deices are designed to inspect IP packets entering the network and add MPLS headers, as well as remoing the headers from packets leaing the MPLS network. Within the boundaries of the MPLS network, deices known as label switch routers (LSRs) look for an MPLS label on each packet that passes through them, looking up and following the instructions contained in those labels, routing them based on a list of instructions. MPLS allows administrators to define routes known as label switched paths (LSPs) from one LER to another, through a series of LSRS, across the MPLS network. These LSPs are preassigned and pre-engineered paths that packets with a certain label follow. This example shows the first two reports that display on the page. Chapter 2. Understanding your data 11

22 This example shows the other two reports. SLA Group Summary Report This example shows two group summary tables, each for a different technology, on the same page. 12 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

23 Resource Threshold Table A Resource Threshold Table (RTT) displays a list of resources that hae iolated their threshold for a specific metric. An RTT can display these alues for each resource: Property alues for resources. Statistics (ag, max, min, count, sum). Number of threshold iolations. Accumulated iolation time for the SLA period. Limit of iolation time for the SLA period. Indiidual threshold as configured in the propertyvalue parameter of the metric iolating a threshold. Aggregated alues during the reporting period. RTT reports are typically not deployed as the initial report that displays when you access the portal. You typically naigate to an RTT report from a GST report by using the threshold oerflow cell naigation link. As with GST reports, the threshold information indicated by the RTT report depends on the report mode, NOC, SLA, or Proactie SLA. The content and color of the column (red or orange) depend on the highest threshold iolated. Orange indicates a warning, red a critical condition. NOC RTT report A NOC RTT report displays a list of resources that were in burst threshold iolation at least once during the reporting period. The Percent of alue oer Threshold column displays an estimate of how long the alue exceeded the threshold, shown in percentage of time. SLA RTT report The SLA RTT report lists the resources that are in period threshold iolation. The Percent of time oer Threshold column displays an estimate of how long the alue exceeded the threshold, shown in percentage of time. Proactie SLA RTT report A Proactie RTT report lists the resources that risk iolating their thresholds. Resources that are closest to iolating their thresholds are listed first. Chapter 2. Understanding your data 13

24 Resource Summary Table Resource Summary Table (RST) reports display a list of the indiidual resources contained in a resource group. RST reports lists each resource within a group along with the following information: Statistic results for the reporting period. Sampling quality for the report when the quality statistic is displayed. This alue is the number of actual samples receied during the reporting period compared to the expected number of measurements. Aggregation results (min, max, aerage, count, or sum) for the reporting period. Properties of the resource. RSTs can be configured to support up to 20 metrics. RST reports are not typically deployed on the portal. Users typically naigate to the RST report from the GST report, by using the group name link. An RST report also proides a link to the detailed charts. Support for Most Recent Values RST reports support Most Recent Values for the last alue and last time metrics, as well as for burst threshold iolations. The following figure shows an RST report on the portal that has been configured to support Most Recent Values: These icons represent threshold information (normal, warning, and iolation). 14 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

25 Related tasks Adding Most Recent Value support to an RST on page 132 User-editable features of RST reports Some GUI features of RST tables can be flagged by the content designer as user-editable. User-editable GUI features are only aailable in RST tables. If a report feature is editable, an Edit button displays on the report. For example, entries in the Name column can be flagged to be editable by NOC administrators, by report users, or both. A user can change the name of a subelement or deice to a more familiar name. Consider a deice displayed in an RST report as de4_if: 2 (100Mbps), which is the name assigned to the deice in the database during Netcool/Proiso deice discoery. On an RST report with a user-editable Name field, you can change the deice name to Router Floor 3, Room 506. Related concepts User-editable RST reports on page 57 Support for user-editable properties on page 205 Aperiodic metrics Aperiodic metrics produce data at irregular, eer-increasing time interals. This behaior is in contrast to periodic metrics, which produce data at regular, increasing time interals. Aperiodic metrics are typically used to represent state changes for a subelement, such as a change in the status of a link from up to down. The interals between these state changes are unpredictable. The alues produced by aperiodic metrics are numeric, just like periodic metrics. Howeer, these alues are typically restricted to a few predetermined alues, which represent a set of states. The numeric alues are then mapped to an enumeration set to proide a text representation of the metric. For example, as shown in the following figure, the alues 1 and 0 produced by an aperiodic metric can be mapped to the alues Good and Bad to proide a more easily understood status for the subelement. Chapter 2. Understanding your data 15

26 Composite Resource Summary Table The Composite Resource Summary Table (CRST) proides information about resources that hae a configuration-based relationship. The CRST reports on those resources, which are considered composite subelements. The CRST displays the statistics attached to the different related subelements that comprise the composite subelement in the same report. For example, the composite subelement can list all the subelements that constitute a complete path, such as the Data-Link Connection Identifiers (DLCIs) in a Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC). The DLCIs constitute a path from one data terminal equipment (DTE) deice to another. Netcool/Proiso considers the PVC as a subelement, which in turn points to the DLCI subelements. You can generate a CRST to report on up to 10 formulas with their associated relationships for the PVC and DLCIs associated with a specific path. You can define which relationship to associate with a formula to be displayed on the CRST report, and maintain the order of the subelements. You can configure and display up to fie relationship properties. The relation-metric-statistics are displayed in adjacent columns. One relationship is associated with each property. Note: You can drill down from a CRST to a composite resource time series report. The following figure shows an example CRST report. Related concepts Time Series Charts on page 36 Inentory Summary Table Inentory Summary Table (IST) reports proide information about the subelements found within a group or CSE relationship. An IST is like a Resource Summary Table (RST), except that the IST contains no metrics or statistics. An IST simply lists and describes the subelements that match the specified criteria. The IST displays one subelement per row. By default, rows are sorted by subelement label in ascending order. The IST can display zero or more associated subelement property alues, depending on the table configuration. 16 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

27 IST configuration In addition to the standard table features, such as customizable column headers, paging, and sorting, configurable options for the IST report include: Zero or more subelement properties Subelement attribute filters (family, property, and relation) Table legends Table suppression if no subelements match the configured criteria When configuring an IST, ensure that you set the InentorySummaryTable parameter to true. This parameter is part of the statstablemediator configuration. Since the IST contains no metric data, do not specify any metric formulas when you are configuring an IST. Table population An IST is populated with subelements that match the filtering criteria (family, property, relation) specified by the table configuration. Filtering criteria can be applied against subelements in a group hierarchy or CSE hierarchy, as follows: Group hierarchy The IST can be included in a report deployed at any leel of the group hierarchy. Filtering criteria is applied to subelements located at leels below the group specified by the portal. CSE hierarchy The IST proides an entry point into the CSE hierarchy. The IST can be included in a report referenced by a drill-down link from another CSE-based report. Filtering criteria is applied to subelements located in the CSE hierarchy below the referenced CSE. In a CSE hierarchy, the target of a link is located below the source of the link. Resource Planning Table The Resource Planning Table (RPT) is a summary report that displays a list of resources and the upgrade condition, forecast date, and trend direction for each resource. An RPT displays resources for which data will reach a configured threshold within a time window. It proides a iew to the trend, or eolution, of the data towards an upgrade condition. The upgrade condition is the alue that when reached, indicates the resource needs to be upgraded. This alue is ariable according to the technology (for example, saturation condition depending on the protocol used), speed (a faster link saturates sooner in percentage), and leel at which you want to make an upgrade (a lower upgrade condition triggers an earlier upgrade). The RPT report includes the following information: List of subelement names The Upgrade Condition Point where the trend line intersects with the forecast target (upgrade condition) in a Predicted Upgrade column Column containing current information and a column displaying information for the same metric/resource for the preious reporting period (optional) The report shows data for the period selected in the report naigation. For example, a daily report shows data for the selected day. The report period defines Chapter 2. Understanding your data 17

28 which periods are used for computation of the trend line and the predicted date (date when the metric meets the upgrade conditions.) For example, the periods used to compute the trending information for a monthly trending report are months. Note: Users can drill down to a trending time series report from the RPT by clicking the resource name, if this capability has been configured. Related concepts Trending and forecasting reports on page 46 Rank Variation Table The Rank Variation Table compares the resource ranking in the current reporting period to the resource ranking in the preious reporting period. A single statistic (min, max, ag, sum, count) is used for the comparison. Rank ariation helps you identify unusual resource behaior by the difference between the current and preious ranking of the resource. For example, a resource that was number 256 in the throughput ranking for the prior reporting period and is now number 5 would require your attention. Because the report is used to compare the rank of one resource/metric from one period to another, you must define the period to use. This table shows report period comparisons. Report Period Day Week Month Quarterly Compare To Preious day Preious week Preious month Preious quarter You can click a resource name to access the baseline detail chart. The baseline detail chart illustrates the unusual behaior of this resource, as compared to its performance in the past. If the behaior of a resource is not typical of its group (high rank in the rank ariation) but is typical compared to its past performance (the current line and the bars in the baseline chart are similar), it is because the group is somehow moing. If resource behaior is not typical compared to its past (the current line and the bars in the baseline chart are different), it requires inestigation. Reiewing the baseline chart and additional metrics can help pinpoint the problems, such as more or less olume, more congestion or discards. Rank ariation displays can include filtered or non-filtered results. A report to which filtering criteria was applied to displays those results that meet the filtering criteria. A message displays at the bottom of the table that indicates whether the results were filtered or not. 18 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

29 Calender Table Calendar Tables proide details of the calendar that was in effect during the reporting period. Calender Table information includes: Offset from GMT applied to raw data before aggregation Scheduled outages Time periods during which SLA calculations were applied Property History Table The Property History table displays property alues for a single resource oer the report period. The date column defines when the displayed alue was put into effect. Threshold History Table The Threshold History table displays the history of thresholds alues associated with a metric. Each successie row of the table contains information about the configuration of a threshold during a gien period. The information displayed includes: Start date of the reporting period Statistic used for the calculation of the threshold Period during which SLA calculations were applied Leel and duration of critical and warning thresholds Matrix Table The Matrix table is an oeriew report that shows data on both directions in a set of bi-directional paths. It is frequently used to monitor a fully meshed set of sites by depicting site-to-site metrics. In a Matrix table: The row labels show the sources and the column labels show the destinations of end-to-end paths or any resource-supporting From and To-type attributes (for example, Cisco IP SLA probes), and modeled as subelements. Each cell shows a metric alue, the state of a threshold or both. Metric alues can be either historic alues from the database or the last alue collected, that is, Near Real Time (NRT) as reported by the DataChannel. You can drill down from a cell to a report, typically a single time series report. Matrix Table layout The Matrix Table layout has a number of aspects. Subelement (resource) modeling is used to: Represent paths Proide metrics on paths Define source and destination identifiers for labels on the report Filter a set of resources representing the paths out of a larger set of resources Defining threshold leels Chapter 2. Understanding your data 19

30 Een a small Matrix Table contains many statistics. For example, a table for a fully meshed network of 25 endpoints contains 625 cells. This results in 600 resources; 625 less the 25 cells in the diagonal. Diagonal cells are not a alid path as the source equals the destination. Modeling plays a greater role in the Matrix Table than in other charts and tables. Path identification: A path is a set of two endpoints and a direction. For example, endpoint A to endpoint B is one path, and its opposite path is endpoint B to endpoint A. In addition, there are two ways to model paths: Model 1: A path and its opposite path are modeled by using two resources, that is, one resource per direction. Model 2: A path and its opposite path are modeled by using one resource and two metrics, that is, one metric per direction. The two models chosen for representing paths rely on property alues to identify endpoints. The Matrix Table restricts its search for endpoints to those resources contained in a group. It does not matter if resources are all contained directly in the specified group (that is, a flat hierarchy) or organized in a hierarchy of groups organized in some logical structure (for example, by location). In the later case, subelements are found by walking down the hierarchy from the reporting group to the leaf groups. The modeling for the Matrix Table is defined by using the DataMart tools (that is, to define the grouping structure, create resources and set properties association). The property used to identify the source and destinations are designated in the reporter editor (accessible by using the DataView Naigator tool). This approach allows you to choose what properties are used instead of forcing you to use a specific set of properties. In both models, the labels for the Matrix Table are taken from the alues of the source and destination properties. Note: If a resource has an association with both properties but one of the property alues is null, then the resource does not appear in the matrix. Model 1: A path represented by two resources Using this model, the Matrix Table assumes that a path is represented by a pair of resources; one resource for each direction of the path. With this approach, the source and destination of the path are stored as a set of property alues so that the direction of traffic represented by the path is clearly identified. For example, these two tables show the subelements for a Bi-directional Path - Amsterdam to and from New York. SE1 Name: Property: Source, Amsterdam New York Value: Amsterdam 20 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

31 SE1 Property: Destination, Value: New York Latency: 150 SE2 Name: New York Amsterdam Property: Source, Value: New York Property: Destination, Value: Amsterdam Latency: 100 Values are collected alues to measure Latency. Using Model 1, the Matrix table displays one cell per resource, the content of the cell is the metric alue. (in the preious example, the Latency ). Only one metric is supported. The metric is chosen at design time. A reporter parameter Source/Dest must be set to SourceAndDestination to indicate that this metric is used to build the entire matrix. This table shows the information as it displays in the Netcool/Proiso Network and Serice Center: Source / Destination Amsterdam New York Amsterdam 150 New York 100 The cell Amsterdam New York shows the Latency metric for SE1. The cell New York Amsterdam shows the Latency metric for SE2. SE1 Name: Model 2: A path represented by one resource Using this model, the Matrix Table assumes that a path is represented by one resource for both directions. With this approach, the endpoints of the path are stored as a set of property alues, and there are two metrics that are collected on the resource to characterize the traffic in both directions. For example, this table shows the subelement for a Bi-directional Path, Amsterdam to/from New York SE2 Name: New York Amsterdam Property: Source, Value: New York Property: Destination, Value: Amsterdam Inbound Jitter: 150 Outbound Jitter: 150 Chapter 2. Understanding your data 21

32 Using Model 2, the Matrix table displays two cells per resource, the content of a cell is the metric alue for one direction (in the preious example the Inbound Jitter ), The second metric alue ( Outbound Jitter) displays in the opposite cell of the matrix. Two metrics are supported. They are chosen at design time. A reporter parameter Source/Dest can be set to each metric to determine which metric to use for the path Source Destination (as described by the property alues source and destination associated with the resource), and which metric to use for the path Destination Source. The following table shows the information as it displays in the Netcool/Proiso - Network and Serice Center: Source / Destination Amsterdam New York Amsterdam 150 New York 100 The cell Amsterdam New York shows the Inbound Jitter metric for SE1. The cell New York Amsterdam shows the Outbound Jitter metric for SE2. Matrix Table row and column labels: The rows and columns in a Matrix Table can be labeled in two ways. With the first option, the rows and columns are labeled with the alues used in the source and destination properties in the simple model. With the second option, the rows and columns are labeled with the alues of two additional resource properties specified at design time. The following two examples show how a Matrix Table can be produced when additional properties are and are not specified for row and column labels. Option 1: No additional properties specified Matrix Modeling SE1 Name: Amsterdam New York Property: Source, Value: AMS Property: Destination, Value: NY Latency: 150 SE2 Name: New York Amsterdam Property: Source, Value: NY Property: Destination, Value: AMS Latency: 100 This table shows the information as it would display in the Netcool/Proiso Network and Serice Center: 22 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

33 Source / Destination Amsterdam New York AMS 150 NY 100 Option 2: Additional properties specified Matrix Modeling SE1 Name: Amsterdam New York Property: Source, Value: AMS Property: Destination, Value: NY Property: customerfacingsourcename, Value: Amsterdam Property: customerfacingdestinationname, Value: New York Latency: 150 SE2 Name: New York Amsterdam Property: Source, Value: NY Property: Destination, Value: AMS Property: customerfacingsourcename, Value: Amsterdam Property: customerfacingdestinationname, Value: New York Latency: 100 This table shows the information as it would display in the Netcool/Proiso Network and Serice Center: Source / Destination Amsterdam New York Amsterdam 150 New York 100 Well designed resource models are important as they determine the row and column labels in the Matrix Table. If the property alues are not consistent between the resources, the row and column labels in the Matrix Table do not properly align. Note: Extra rows and columns are created in the Matrix Table when there are different alues for the New York' endpoint of the following resource model. Option 2: Additional Properties Specified Incorrectly Matrix Modeling SE1 Name: Property: Source, Amsterdam New York Value: AMS Chapter 2. Understanding your data 23

34 SE1 Property: Destination, Value: NY Property: customerfacingsourcename, Value: Amsterdam Property: customerfacingdestinationname, Value: New York Latency: 150 SE2 Name: New York Amsterdam Property: Source, Value: NY Property: Destination, Value: AMS Property: customerfacingsourcename, Value: New York, NY Property: customerfacingdestinationname, Value: Amsterdam Latency: 100 This table shows the information as it would display in the Netcool/Proiso Network and Serice Center: Source / Destination Amsterdam New York New York, NY Amsterdam 150 New York New York, NY 100 There is also an option to create an index for each source and to use this index as a column label. An additional column is added to show the correspondence between an index and a source/destination. This option is useful when the matrix is wide; only use this option for symmetrical Matrix Tables. This table shows the information as it would display in the Netcool/Proiso Network and Serice Center: Source / Destination Amsterdam New York 1 Amsterdam New York 100 Threshold: The Matrix Table is designed to display metrics threshold iolations. Note: The Matrix table does not use the Proiso threshold computed by the CME but instead has its own threshold configuration. This approach allows for per resource, per metric and per report threshold configuration. A threshold is defined by: Threshold leel The critical threshold leel is stored in a resource property so that each resource can hae a different threshold leel. There is also a default threshold alue that is used if a threshold for a resource is not defined. 24 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

35 This default alue can also be useful if the nature of the metric is such that it makes sense for all resources to hae the same threshold, rather than forcing the creation of a threshold property on each resource. Direction of iolation Oer The metric must exceed the threshold leel to be iolated. Under The metric must fall below the threshold leel to be iolated. Percentage Defines the percentage under/oer the threshold to use to calculate the warning leel. Example A: Matrix Configuration Matrix Modeling Threshold Property: SLATarget Percentage: 10 Oer: True SE Header Name: Amsterdam New York (Best Effort COS) Property: SLATarget is 100 Consider the formula Latency : The resource is ok if the Latency alue X is < 90 ( SLA Target property alue 10% of SLA target alue) The resource is at Warning leel if 90 <= X < 100 ( SLA Target property alue) The resource is at Critical leel if X >= 100 Example B: Matrix Configuration Matrix Modeling Threshold Property: SLATarget Percentage: 10 Oer: False SE Name: Amsterdam New York (Best Effort COS) Property: SLATarget is 100 Consider the formula Latency : The resource is ok if the Latency alue X is >110 ( SLA Target property alue + 10%) The resource is at Warning leel if 110 >= X>100 The resource is at Critical leel if X <= 100 Chapter 2. Understanding your data 25

36 Matrix Table format: Each matrix cell displays information about a single metric or statistic alue for a gien resource. A Matrix table can be displayed in two formats: 1. The Numeric format, like an automobile map that shows distances between cities, shows for example, Inbound/Outbound Latency, as shown. With the Numeric format: Cell Text the cell text displays the metric/statistic alues as numbers. when a resource exists for a cell but the metric/statistic does not hae a alue a - is displayed. when there is no resource to represent a cell no text is displayed. Cell Background Color White is displayed for metric alues that do not iolate the threshold or if there is no alue. Orange is displayed for metric alues that iolate the threshold by less than X%. Red is displayed for metric alues that iolate the threshold by X% or more. 2. The Icons format is useful to display many sites and their status at a glance, as shown. Colored cells represent status of the metric with respect to the threshold. 26 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

37 With the Icons format: The Green icon means that the metric alue does not iolate the threshold The Orange/white icon means that the metric alue iolates the threshold by less than X% The Red icon means that the metric alue iolates the threshold by X% or more The X icon can mean that a resource exists for the cell but there are not any alues for the defined metric. It can also mean that there is more than one resource that has the same source and destination, that is, represents the same path. Note: These icons can be customized for iewing on the portal. Howeer, unless this customization is carried out for all formats, different icons can be displayed in scheduled or PDF reports. Both formats allow you to alter your iew/information aailable in the DataView portal as follows: Filter on warning and critical alues Sort by metric alues or source name Hoer help is aailable on each cell to indicate the resource name, the formula and statistic being used, the metric alue and the threshold alues, that is, warning and critical. drill down from a row or column to report on a subset of the resources. Typically the drill-down would lead to an RST report. Drill down from a cell to report on the corresponding resource. Typically the drill-down would lead to a Time series report. Chapter 2. Understanding your data 27

38 Flip a Matrix A Matrix table is normally represented with the sources as the rows and the destinations as the columns. Howeer, by using a design time parameter the table can be "flipped", that is, the destinations become the rows and the sources become the columns. Flipping a Matrix Table can make it easier to see an asymmetric matrix, which typically has few sources and large number of destinations. For example, as with the hub-spoke network model. Note: A parameter specified during design enables a Matrix Table to be flipped. It is not possible to flip a Matrix Table already displayed on the portal. Asymmetric Matrix table: Flipped Asymmetric Matrix table: 28 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

39 Matrix Table sorting and resetting: The Matrix table allows sorting on the metric alues and source names. The sort can be performed on a column and in both directions, that is, ascending or descending order. Alphanumeric sorting respects the locale defined in the browser. When the Matrix table is generated, an icon (showing an arrow pointing down) is aailable in each column label cell. Clicking this icon sorts the column in descending order. The icon in the sorted column now shows the direction of the sort (in this case the arrow remains pointing down). Clicking this icon again sorts the column in the opposite direction and also switch the direction of the icon (in this case the arrow switches to pointing up). A link labeled Reset is displayed in the Matrix table caption on the left of the info link. Clicking the reset link, returns the Matrix table to its initial state, that is, the rows and columns are sorted in alphabetic order. Sorting on the Source column produces the following Matrix table: Sorting on the Genea column produces the following Matrix table: Chapter 2. Understanding your data 29

40 Matrix Table filtering: Matrix Table content can be filtered to display arious threshold information. Matrix Table content can be filtered to display: Only the critical alues: shows only the rows and columns that hae alues that iolate the threshold for the gien metric. Only the warning alues: shows only the rows and columns that hae alues that are close to iolating the threshold for the gien metric. Only warning and critical alues: shows only the rows and columns that hae alues that are close to iolating or that did iolate the threshold for the gien metric. Consider the following Matrix Table: 30 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

41 Filtering on Critical produces the following Matrix table: Note: All rows and columns that did not contain at least one warning or critical status hae been remoed. Chapter 2. Understanding your data 31

42 With the Numeric format: Values that are close to the threshold (warning) are displayed as orange cells. Values that hae iolated the threshold (critical) are displayed as red cells. You can apply a filter on the Matrix Table by clicking the critical and warning toggle buttons. When a toggle button is shown as pressed, the filter is applied. If not, the filter is not applied. Both the critical and warning filters can be applied at the same time. With the Icons format: The legend explains the meaning of the icons. You can apply a filter on the Matrix Table by clicking the critical and warning toggle icons. When a toggle button is shown as pressed, the filter is applied. If not, the filter is not applied. Both the critical and warning filters can be applied at the same time. The other icons in the legend cannot be toggled. Note: If you filter the Matrix, and the resulting matrix is not wide enough to accommodate the legend, then the legend is truncated. This situation can result in all the filter icons not being accessible. In this case, use the Reset link to return to the original unfiltered matrix. This situation only occurs with the Internet Explorer browser. Legend A legend is displayed on the left side of the Matrix table caption. The legend, and therefore the filter, are optional. A report parameter, set at design time, determines whether the Matrix Table has a legend. CSV export of a Matrix Table: The CSV export of a Matrix Table is designed to represent the Matrix Table displayed on the portal. This results in a simple CSV format, rather than displaying all the information used to construct the Matrix Table, as is done with most other charts and tables. The CSV file generated: Only contains the labels and metric alues for all the resources in the Matrix Table. Does not contain threshold information. Does not allow filtering on critical or warning alues in the CSV file content. Does not sort the information, een if the matrix is sorted on a column. Is encoded in UTF-8. The following figures show a Matrix table and its CSV export. 32 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

43 Charts Your data can be displayed in arious chart types. Real-Time Charts Real-Time Charts show you performance metrics in real time, with little delay between data collection and display. Real-time charts proide a real-time iew of performance metrics. Real-time charts are actiated from static (on-demand) charts that hae been enabled with real-time capability. Note: You must hae the Jaa Runtime Enironment (JRE) installed to display a real-time chart. If it is not already installed, you are prompted to install the JRE the first time you access a real-time chart in your browser. You can download the JRE from the Sun download page at Chapter 2. Understanding your data 33

44 Example The following example shows two real-time charts actiated from an on-demand chart. Related tasks Appendix D, Troubleshooting real-time charts, on page 231 Resource Baseline Charts The Resource Baseline Chart (RBC) contains current and historical data. You can compare statistics from the current period with the historic behaior of the same resource to identify differences in behaior. Most often the RBC is accessed by drilling down from the Rank Variation report. Rank ariation helps you identify unusual resource behaior by the difference between the current and preious ranking of a resource. You can then drill down from the report to a baseline chart to obtain more detailed information about atypical behaior. The following figure shows a baseline chart. 34 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

45 Distribution Charts A Distribution Chart (Pie Chart) shows the distribution of resources or groups across specific ranges. Specific ranges could include Multiple resources for one formula Multiple groups for one formula Multiple formulas for one resource Multiple formulas for one group Resources or groups across specific ranges For example, if you want to identify oerloaded interfaces within a group and you want those interfaces sorted across four ranges (10 range maximum.) Ranges could include: 80% or more of aerage indicates oerloaded interfaces that need upgrading 60-79% of aerage indicates oerloaded interfaces that require monitoring 30-59% of aerage indicates interfaces within a normal range 29% or less of aerage indicates under-used interfaces potentially aailable for load balancing A legend for the distribution chart also displays in the report. Typically, distribution charts are configured sot that you can click any line in the legend to drill down to a TopN/BottomN report of the resource. The following figure shows a range distribution chart for the Inbound Volume (octets) metric. You can drill down on the indiidual line items in the legend. Chapter 2. Understanding your data 35

46 Time Series Charts Time series charts present a series of data points collected oer a specified reporting period. The x-axis plots time and the y-axis plots data points. The following time interals affect the content of a time series chart: Reporting period The period during which data points are collected for presentation in a chart. For example, a time series chart might present aggregated data points collected oer a 24-hour period. Granularity The period during which data is considered for generating a single, aggregated data point. For example, suppose you want to find the aerage bps for a network deice within a reporting period of one day. You could calculate a single data point consisting of the aerage of all data points collected within that 24-hour period. Or you could apply a finer granularity by calculating the aerage of data points collected within a smaller time period, such as 1 hour, oer the course of the 24-hour period. If you apply a granularity of one hour for a reporting period of one day, the chart would contain 24 aggregated data points. For information about the granularity periods that are supported for a gien reporting period and report type, see the table in Data aggregation. Types of time series charts Time series charts include: Resource Time Series (RTS). A collection of data points for a single resource oer a gien reporting period. Data aggregations in a Resource Time Series chart are time aggregations. Group Time Series (GTS). A collection of data points for a group of resources oer a gien reporting period. Data aggregations in a Group Time Series chart are spatial aggregations. Adanced Group Time Series (AGTS). A data set consisting of both time and spatial aggregations. Trending and Forecasting Time Series. A collection of data points collected oer a trending and forecasting period rather than oer a reporting period. Multi-Resource Time Series. A collection of data for multiple resources (maximum of 100) and for multiple periods. Note: The type of chart displayed depends on the type of chart style assigned to the report. If no chart style is specified, the default is a line chart. Related concepts Data aggregation on page 6 Composite Resource Summary Table on page 16 The effect of granularity and polling period on aggregation The effectie granularity for an aggregation is the granularity period that is used in the aggregation. In some cases, the granularity that is specified for an aggregation is not the same as the effectie granularity. The effectie granularity of an aggregation depends upon the relationship between the specified granularity and the polling period, as follows: 36 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

47 Granularity = polling period The effectie granularity is the same as the polling period, for example: If the polling period is 1 minute and the specified granularity is 1 minute, the effectie granularity is also 1 minute. If the polling period is 5 minutes and the specified granularity is 5 minutes, the effectie granularity is also 5 minutes. In both cases, if all resources hae metrics for each polling period, one data point is collected for each resource during the effectie granularity period. Granularity < polling period The effectie granularity is the same as the polling period. For example, gien a specified granularity of 1 minute and a polling period of 1 minutes, the effectie granularity is 1 minutes. If all resources hae metrics for each polling period, a data point is produced eery fifth aggregation (eery 5 minutes) because no data has been sampled for four of the 5 minutes. If the group has 10 resources, the aggregation is based on a sample of 10 metrics during the 5 minute effectie granularity period. Granularity > polling period The effectie granularity is the same as the specified granularity. For example, if the polling period is 5 minutes and the specified granularity is 10 minutes, the effectie granularity is 10 minutes. If all resources hae metrics for each polling period, the number of data points included in the aggregation are equal to twice the number of polled resources. If the group has three resources, the aggregation is based on a sample of six metrics (two for each resource) during the effectie aggregation period. Changing granularity and granularity precedence You can change the granularity of the data displayed in GTS and RTS line charts. Some methods of changing granularity take precedence oer others. You can change the granularity of the data displayed in GTS and RTS line charts by using any of the following methods: Allowing users to change the data granularity by giing them the appropriate permissions on the portal. Setting the data granularity that a user can select for a report. Setting granularity defaults for time series reports. Setting data granularity through reporter parameters for all charts (TimeSeriesGranularity parameter) or for a specific chart (Granularity parameter) in a time series reporter. Granularity precedence The following order of precedence of the granularity applies when selected through different methods: 1. Granularity reporter parameter. 2. TimeSeriesGranularity reporter parameter. 3. Granularity set through the portal by the user. 4. Granularity preferences set for a user by the system administrator. 5. Granularity configured for the system by the system administrator. 6. Default system granularity set by the product installation. Chapter 2. Understanding your data 37

48 Related tasks Configuring time series granularity for a user on page 91 Changing time series granularity on page 60 Configuring the default time series granularity settings for the system on page 94 Resource Time Series Resource Time Series (RTS) reports contain raw or aggregated data for a single resource oer a particular reporting period. Raw data can be displayed for daily and weekly reporting periods only. Aggregated data can be displayed for any reporting period, but different reporting periods support different granularity. RTS reports support Near Real Time (NRT) data points. NRT data is raw data collected during the current hour that has not yet been written to the database. Time aggregation: Time aggregation is the aggregation of all data points for a single resource oer a specified period (the granularity). Data aggregations in Resource Time Series reports are of the time aggregation type. The result of the aggregation is one data point that reflects a statistical iew of the collected and aggregated data points. For example, aerage, minimum, maximum, sum, or count. Typically, multiple aggregated data points are presented in a report for a gien reporting period. The following figure illustrates time aggregation: In this figure: Data points are collected from a single resource (Resource A) eery 5 minutes (the polling period). The granularity for this aggregation is 20 minutes. The data points collected during each granularity period are aggregated into a single statistical alue. For example, the aerage of all the collected data points. The time stamp for each aggregated alue is taken from the middle of the granularity period. In this figure, 6:10 (halfway between 6:00:00 and 6:19:59) and 6:30 (halfway between 6:20:00 and 6:39:59). Group Time Series Group Time Series (GTS) reports contain raw or aggregated data for a group of resources oer a particular reporting period. 38 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

49 Raw data can be displayed for daily and weekly reporting periods only. Aggregated data can be displayed for any reporting period, but different reporting periods support different granularity alues. GTS reports support the following features: Near Real Time (NRT) data points. NRT data is raw data collected during the current hour that has not yet been written to the database. Access to all branches of a group hierarchy. Subelement groups are organized within a tree structure. When a GTS report is deployed against a particular group in a group tree, resources in that group and in groups at all leels of the tree below it are included in the aggregation. If a particular resource appears in multiple groups within the group tree, that resource is included in the aggregation only once. Note: You can encounter performance issues with GTS reports containing more than 100 resources. Spatial aggregation: Spatial aggregation is the aggregation of all data points for a group of resources oer a specified period (the granularity). Data aggregations in Group Time Series reports are of the spatial aggregation type. The result of the aggregation is one data point that reflects some statistical iew of the collected and aggregated data points for example, aerage, minimum, maximum, sum, or count. Typically, multiple aggregated data points are presented in a report for the gien reporting period. This figure shows spatial aggregation where Granularity = Polling Period. In this figure: Data points are collected from a group of three resources (Interface A, Interface B, and Interface C) eery 5 minutes (the polling period). The granularity for this aggregation is also 5 minutes. The data points collected during each granularity period are aggregated into a single statistical alue. For example, the aerage of all the collected data points. Chapter 2. Understanding your data 39

50 The time stamp for each aggregated alue is taken from the middle of the 5 minute granularity period. For example, 6.02 is the midpoint between 6:00:00 and 6:04:59, gien the two-decimal precision. The following figure shows the preious case, but with a 10 minute granularity. Note the data points collected during the 5 minute, 6:40:00 6:44:59 polling period hae not yet been included in the next 10 minute aggregation: Sum of Aerage Reports: A Sum of Aerage (sumofag) report is an extension of the Group Time Series report. It calculates two data points for each granularity period. A Sum of Aerage report: Performs a spatial aggregation on a group of resources, calculating the aerage of all data points collected during the granularity period. Finds the sum of aggregated aerages by adding the current aggregated aerage to the preious aggregated aerage. In the first sumofag aggregation in the sequence, the current aggregated aerage is the same as the sum. The following figure shows a sumofag aggregation: 40 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

51 Note: A sumofag report does not support Near Real Time data points. In other words, sumofag includes data from the DataView database only. It does not include data collected since the last time data was saed. Adanced Group Time Series The Adanced Group Time Series (AGTS) report contains both time and spatial aggregations. AGTS reports allow you to aggregate a set of aggregated data points. For example, when monitoring throughput for a group of interfaces, you might first calculate the aerage throughput for all the interfaces in the group (spatial aggregation). You might then calculate the sum of all the aggregated aerages collected oer a gien time period (time aggregation). The result of an AGTS report depends upon the order in which the time and spatial aggregations occur. Note: For best results from AGTS reports, consider assigning the same polling period to all resources within a gien reporting group tree structure. Improements to Adanced Group Time Series reports Current AGTS reports hae this improed functionality: The time-stamp of the collected data is shifted because of oerload of the collector, the network, or the SNMP agent of the deice. The collector is restarted in less than one polling cycle. Collection is interrupted on one of the resources of the group. An AGTS report can be deployed aboe a leaf node so that the group time series is calculated from the union of all resources within subgroups. Support was added for reporting on Near Real Time (NRT) data. NRT data is the last hour of raw data receied but not yet written to the database. Performance has been enhanced. If the same subelement is in more than one subgroup, only one instance is taken into account by the GTS (or RTS) reports. Spatial/Temporal AGTS: Chapter 2. Understanding your data 41

52 Spatial/Temporal AGTS reports perform time aggregation for a single resource, and then perform spatial aggregation on the results. With Spatial/Temporal AGTS, the following steps are performed in this order: 1. Perform spatial aggregation on a group of resources, generating a time series of data points for each specified formula. 2. Perform time aggregation on the generated data points within the granularity period. The following figure illustrates a Spatial/Temporal AGTS that first calculates a spatially aggregated aerage, and then calculates a temporally aggregated sum of the aerages: In this figure: The aggregation done first (the primary aggregation) is the spatial aggregation. With AGTS, the effectie granularity for the spatial aggregation is the same as the polling period. The system determines the maximum polling period for a gien set of groups and performs spatial aggregation on all data points within that polling period. The polling period cannot be changed on the client. In this case, the polling period for the primary aggregation is 5 minutes. The aggregation done second (the secondary aggregation) is the time aggregation. With AGTS, the granularity for time aggregation is set just as it is for Resource Time Series. The granularity period is set on the client. In this case, the granularity period for the secondary aggregation is 20 minutes. Note: Spatial/temporal AGTS only considers data points from resources at the leaf of the group tree where it must be deployed. Also, it does not support Near Real Time data. Temporal/Spatial AGTS: Temporal/Spatial AGTS reports perform time aggregation for a single resource, and then perform spatial aggregation on the results. 42 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

53 With Temporal/Spatial AGTS, the following steps are performed in the following order: 1. Perform time aggregation for a single resource within the granularity period, generating a time series of data points for each specified formula. 2. Perform spatial aggregation on the group of data points generated by the time aggregation. The following figure illustrates a Temporal/Spatial AGTS that first calculates a temporally aggregated aerage, and then calculates a spatially aggregated sum of the aerages: In this figure: The primary aggregation is the time aggregation. With Adanced Group Time Series, the granularity for time aggregation is set just as it is for Resource Time Series. The granularity period is set on the client. In this case, the granularity period for the primary aggregation is 20 minutes. The secondary aggregation is the spatial aggregation. With Adanced Group Time Series, the effectie granularity for the spatial aggregation is the same as for the time aggregation and cannot be changed. In this figure, with a polling period of 5 minutes and a specified granularity of 20 minutes, the effectie granularity is 20 minutes. Note: Temporal/Spatial AGTS considers all data points in the group tree where it is deployed. It also supports Near Real Time data. Trending and Forecasting Time Series Charts The Trending and Forecasting Time Series (TFTS) chart proides information about the trend of a resource towards a predicted upgrade target. The TFTS report differs from a standard time series report in that the report period does not define the window of the data presented; the trending and forecasting periods do. Chapter 2. Understanding your data 43

54 Trending results are rendered as a line within a chart. The chart displays the data used to calculate the trend (the data within the trending period along with the trend line.) The trend is based on the data within the selected report period of daily, weekly, or monthly. The trending period is defined as a set number of periods before the selected reporting date. The upgrade condition is the alue at which any resource that exceeds it needs to be upgraded. The following examples include some of the supported times series reports. Inbound and outbound utilization: The following figure shows a monthly report with a continuous trending period of six months and a forecast period of fie months. Continuous trend mode: Continuous trend mode displays data points that are continuous to the reporting date. In the chart, the data displayed is determined by the trending period. The presentation of the chart is the trending period plus the forecast period. The following figure shows a monthly report with a continue trending period of six months and a forecast period of fie months. Non-continuous trend mode: Displays data points that are associated with the date on which you are reporting, but are not continuous. 44 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

55 For example, if the reporting date for a daily report is a Monday with a date of June 9, the non-continuous dates would include the fie prior Mondays. DataView report types Multi-Resource Time Series: Multi-Resource Time Series (MRTS) charts display data for multiple resources (maximum of 99) and multiple report periods. You can create reports that contain charts with the same report period but different time interals, for example: You can display data for the last three consecutie days in three indiidual charts. You can display the current day, week, and month for a specific set of resources in one report. The following restrictions apply to MRTS reports: If the filter criteria allow more than 99 resources to be selected by a report, resources you expect to display in an MRTS chart might be missing. Resource data are missing because too many resources matched the filter criteria that was specified, not because metric data does not exist for these resources. Only resources that hae metric data aailable to plot are displayed in the final chart. If no resources hae metric data, an empty chart can be displayed. Specific functionality is proided in different types of DataView reports. TopN and BottomN reports TopN and BottomN reports list the highest or lowest alues for a specific metric during the reporting period in both chart and table formats. You can naigate to the detailed charts from the TopN or BottomN report by clicking a resource name in the table or a bar in the chart. TopN and BottomN reports are made up of the following types: Resource Compares resources and reports on the highest or lowest alues for a specific metric. Group Compares groups and reports on the highest or lowest alues for a specific metric. Formula Compares formulas and reports on the highest or lowest alues for a specific resource or group. Chapter 2. Understanding your data 45

56 Note: TopN and BottomN reports can be filtered so that they are based on either resources, groups, and formulas and display just the resources, groups, or formulas that meet specific filtering criteria. Trending and forecasting reports Trending and forecasting reports monitor the trend pattern of resources oer a specific period. For example, the reports can help a bandwidth manager forecast link physical capacity upgrades within a specific time period. With the ability to forecast the need for upgrades, the management of customer connections, trunks, and backbone links becomes simpler. You can generate two reports to display trending and forecasting information. The first summary leel report is called the Resource Planning Table (RPT) report. The second summary leel report is the Trending and Forecasting time series (TFTS) report. You can either drill down to the TFTS from the RPT or deploy the TFTS as a standalone report. Terminology Trending period The number of report periods (days, weeks, or months) used to calculate the trendline. Selected date The last date in the trending period. It corresponds to the date for which the report is being generated. Forecast period The number of report periods (days, weeks, or months) past the selected date to extend the trendline Trending mode How to determine the mode (continuous or non-continuous) by which the specific dates in the forecasting and trending periods are determined when counting forward and backward from the selected date. Upgrade condition When the upgrade condition is met, consider upgrading the resources you are monitoring. Can be hardcoded as a alue or as a percentage of a resource property. Forecast date The point where the trendline crosses your upgrade condition. Consider targeting upgrades for this date. For continuous trending mode, the dates are determined by using one of three sequential patterns: consecutie days, consecutie weeks, or consecutie months. For example: Daily: 05/04/04, 05/05/04, 05/06/04, 05/07/04, 05/08/04 Weekly: 05/03/04, 05/10/04, 05/17/04, 05/24/04 Monthly: 02/01/04, 03/01/04, 04/01/04, 05/01/04 For non-continuous trending mode, the dates are determined by using one of the following fie non-consecutie sequential patterns: day of the week, specific day of the month, last day of the month, month of the quarter, or month of the year. For example: 46 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

57 Day of the week: 05/04/04, 05/11/04, 05/18/04 (Tuesday) Specific day of the month: 03/16/04, 04/16/04, 05/16/04 (16th of the month) Last day of the month: 02/29/04, 03/31/04, 04/30/04, 05/31/04 Month of the quarter: 11/01/03, 02/01/04, 05/01/04 (second month of the quarter) Month of the year: 07/01/02, 07/01/03, 07/01/04 (July) Configuration guidelines Before configuring Trending and Forecasting reports, you need to decide whether you want to use properties to determine the upgrade condition. If so, you need to define two properties: Base property. The property upon which you want the upgrade condition based, for example ifspeed. Multiplier property. The property that contains a alue, most often a percentage, that is multiplied with the base property to obtain the upgrade condition. These properties need to be created and associated with the resources upon which you plan to report. See the Tioli Netcool/Proiso DataMart documentation for information about defining properties. After you define these properties, you need to edit the BaseProperty and MultiplierProperty reporter parameters for both the RPT and the Trending and Forecasting time series. Related concepts Resource Planning Table on page 17 Search reports Search reports allow you to search network resources from the portal. Search reports are primarily intended for NOC users who are familiar with the names and properties of network resources. Netcool/Proiso DataView Search supports the following functionality for the content designer who creates the search table and the user who actually performs the search: Content Designers can: Proide a link to a single report by using the resource name column Define reporters for the links within the reporter Specify multiple tables in a single report Display resource properties as additional columns in a table Choose which columns display in the search criteria fields Create content drill downs on any table column Set a default search string, so that the search table is populated with default results when first iewed Create report drill downs on any property column Sort the search table by any column; to set a default sort column; to specify ascending or descending alphanumeric sort Specify names for columns Enable single or multiple-page display of search table Users can: Search on any column of the search table Chapter 2. Understanding your data 47

58 Search on property columns Use of multiple wildcard characters (*) If allowed, search using multiple search criteria consisting of an AND of each of the specified criteria, as in *name AND property_alue Display the columns in any order Diagnostic reports Diagnostic reports proide details on resources to help find problems. Diagnostic reports are primarily intended for NOC users who are familiar with the names and properties associated with the arious network resources. Diagnostic reports support the following functionality for the content designer who creates the report and the user who iews it: Content Designers can: Proide a link to a single report by using the resource name column Define reporters for the links within the reporter Specify multiple tables in a single report Display resource properties as additional columns in a table Create content drill downs on any table column Create report drill downs on any property column Specify names for columns Enable single or multiple-page display of the report Select metric attributes to display Users can: Access a diagnostic report quickly from a button on the portal Access diagnostic information about resources quickly, without haing to drill down or naigate through a series of standard reports See details on the selected resource and its parent and child resources, if any Top-leel contents of diagnostic reports At the topmost leel, a diagnostic report is made up of the following four tables: Current Resource Current Resource Metric Counts Parents of the Current Resource Children of the Current Resource Diagnostic resource tables contain the following information. Current Resource Column Resource Type ID Resource Name Description The type of the primary resource. Can be group, subelement, orcse. The Netcool/Proiso internal identifier for the resource. The name of the resource. 48 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

59 Column Type State Data of Last Action Last Action Origin User Current Resource Description Depending on the resource type, the possible alues are: Group: cond, generated, rule, static Subelement: algo, fixed, oid CSE: algo, fixed, oid The state of the resource. Can be either on or off. The date and time of the last action on the resource. The last action performed on the resource before the start-time of the report and all actions that occurred during the reporting period. Possible alues are Delete, Insert, Update. The name of the operation or component that performed the action. The name of the user that performed the action. Column Metric Name ID Time zone offset Raw Count Resource Aggregation Count Group Aggregation Count Current Resource Metric Count Description The name of the metric being used in the report under ealuation. The Netcool/Proiso internal identifier for the corresponding metric. The offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). The number of raw metrics during the report period. The number of daily, weekly, and monthly aggregations for the metric during the report period. The number of daily, weekly, and monthly group aggregations for the metric during the report period. Column Name ID Type Parents of the Current Resource Description The name of the resource. The Netcool/Proiso internal identifier for the parent resource. Depending on the resource type, the possible alues are: Group Subelement CSE Chapter 2. Understanding your data 49

60 Column CSE Relation Last Relation Action Date of Last Relation Action Parents of the Current Resource Description If the parent is a CSE, then this column identifies the relation that associates the primary resource with its parent. N/A indicates group to group or group to subelement relations. The last action performed on the relationship between the parent and the primary resource before the start-time of the report and all actions that occurred during the reporting period. Possible alues are Delete, Insert, Update. The date and time of the last action. Column Name ID Type CSE Relation Last Relation Action Date of Last Relation Action Children of the Current Resource Description The name of a child of the primary resource. The Netcool/Proisointernal identifier for the child resource. Depending on the resource type, the possible alues are: Group Subelement CSE If the primary resource is a CSE, then this column identifies the relation that associates the primary resource with its child. N/A indicates group to group or group to subelement relations. The last action performed on the relationship between the primary resource and its child before the start-time of the report and all actions that occurred during the reporting period. Possible alues are Delete, Insert, Update. The date and time of the last action. 50 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

61 Chapter 3. Viewing performance results From the Resource Groups View on the Tioli Integrated Portal, you can see how your network resources are performing. Switch between different Key Performance Indicator (KPI) iews of the data to analyze and monitor your network. Share this information with other stakeholders by scheduling reports, or generating and sending the information in PDF or CSV format. Note: In Tioli Netcool Performance Manager, we introduce the term KPI iews to distinguish between your results as iewed on the portal, and your results as saed or iewed in other formats. During a transition period, the terms KPI iews and reports are used interchangeably in user documentation. Connecting to the serer and logging in Connect to the Netcool/Proiso DataView Web-based application across the network by using a supported Web browser. Before you begin Before logging in to the Netcool/Proiso DataView Application Serer, enable cookies and allow popup windows in your browser. The default port number is and the default secure port is To access the application: 1. Get the application serer URL from your administrator. 2. Open a browser and enter console 3. Enter your user name and password. Example Defined Resource Views To connect to an application serer called DataViewAppSerer that is configured to listen for requests on port 16316, enter this URL in your browser: Naigate to Performance Network Resources Defined Resource Views to see KPI iews of the network performance data that has been collected, aggregated, and stored in the database. The Defined Resource Views window contains the following panes: Resource View Results You can see your results in this pane. To see the results better, you can maximize this pane, and hide the Tioli Integrated Portal naigation. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

62 Resource View Results toolbar The toolbar contains shortcut buttons for routine actions. Only the actions for which you hae permission are aailable. Period Selection pane The Period Selection pane contains a calender where you specify a start date and a period for your KPI iews. Resource Naigation pane The Resource Naigation pane consists of a naigation tab and a search tab, where you can find and select from the aailable KPI iews. Viewing network performance results Use KPI iews to analyze your network performance. Before you begin Ensure that you hae the required permissions for the KPI iews that you need. KPI iews are grouped by resources and resource groups in logical sets of related metrics. To analyze network performance, complete the following high-leel steps: 1. In the Period Selection pane, select a iewing period. At any stage, you can ary the period and see the results in real time. 2. In the Resource Naigation pane, find a KPI iew: Click the Search tab to search for a KPI iew by name. Click the Resource Views tab to naigate to a KPI iew. 3. Select a KPI iew to see the results for your network. The results display in the Resource View Results pane. The position of the KPI iew in the resource group hierarchy is shown in a breadcrumb trail below the toolbar. The name, HTML page, and timestamp of the KPI iew is shown at the bottom of the window. 4. Optional: Browse to identify other KPI iews to run later. The KPI iew continues to generate unless you select another KPI iew to run. 5. Optional: When finished, run other KPI iews as required. Each KPI iew opens in a new tab. What to do next You can export your results in PDF format. Certain types of KPI iews also support exporting in CSV format. 52 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

63 Selecting KPI iews Use the Resource Naigation pane to select KPI iews associated with resources or resource groups. Before you begin The Resource Views tab proides a full iew of the KPI iew hierarchy. Naigate the resource group hierarchy, or search for a particular string by using the Search tab. Search is performed against the current state of the KPI iew hierarchy. Changing the date or period refreshes the KPI iew hierarchy to reflect the state of groups and KPI iews for your selection. Search supports the * wildcard character. To select a KPI iew: 1. In the Resource Naigation pane, find KPI iews associated with a resource or resource group: Click the Search tab and search for resource groups or KPI Views. Click the Resource Views tab and naigate the resource group hierarchy to find a KPI View. 2. Select a KPI iew. Each KPI iew opens in a new tab in the Resource View Results pane. Selecting the date and period for the currently iewed report When you hae selected a report, you can modify the date and reporting period in the Period Selection pane. Before you begin When you select the current period, the start date is adjusted as follows: Daily time periods begin at midnight. Weekly periods begin on the first day of the selected week. The first day is either Sunday or Monday depending on your configuration. Monthly periods begin on the first day of the selected month. Quarterly periods follow set quarters within the calendar year (Jan - Mar, Apr - Jun, Jul - Sep, Oct - Dec). Yearly periods begin on the first day of the calendar year (Jan 1 - Dec 31). The calendar obtains the time zone from the group of the report that is selected, and updates itself accordingly. For example, if a report is selected from a group that has a large positie GMT offset, the day selected can be adjusted ahead. If the group, or any parent groups of the group, do not contain a time zone, then GMT is used. To select a iewing period in the Period Selection pane: Chapter 3. Viewing performance results 53

64 1. To select a start date, click a date in the calender or enter a date in the Date field. The resource hierarchy refreshes to reflect your selection. 2. In the Period menu, select a period. The resource hierarchy refreshes to reflect your selection. Example For a problem with a daily report, determine whether it is a chronic problem or a problem specific to that particular day. Change the reporting period to get that information. If the problem is specific to that particular day, you can then drill down on the resource to get more detailed information. What to do next At any time, you can change the period to see more results in real time. Sorting results Each column heading is a hyperlink. The heading text is in bold when that column is set as the sort criterion. The arrow icon in the column heading indicates the sort direction. 1. Click a column heading to sort the data. The default sort order depends on the type of data displayed. 2. Click the column heading again to sort the data in reerse order. The breadcrumb trail The position of the KPI iew in the resource group hierarchy is shown as a breadcrumb trail in the Resource View Results window. Use the Resource Naigation pane to see other KPI Views or go to a preiously isited resource group. Exporting results to PDF Use this option to export your results to PDF. Before you begin If you hae permission to use this option, the Export to PDF button is aailable in the toolbar. To export data to PDF: 1. In the Resource Groups Results toolbar, click the Export to PDF button. 2. Sae the PDF file. 54 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

65 CSV export format If configured, you can export your results to comma-separated alues (CSV) format. The query sends the data to a data stream rather than generating a report graph or table. If you hae thresholds configured to display in your Detail Chart reports, your CSV export file includes information about how those thresholds are configured. This information is displayed in extra rows and includes alues for the threshold warning leel, critical leel, warning duration, and critical duration. Exporting results to CSV format From certain reports, you can export your results to comma-separated alues (CSV) format. Before you begin Not all reports support CSV export. In reports that do support CSV export, this option is only aailable if it is enabled by the content designer. To export report data to a CSV file: 1. Click the export CSV link at the bottom of the current report. 2. Click Open to open the file in Microsoft Excel, or Sae to sae the data as a CSV file. Getting support from the portal Use the Contact button on the toolbar to get support from your administrator or support desk. Before you begin If you hae permission to use this option, the Contact button is aailable in the toolbar. The default address in the To: field is configured by your administrator and is typically the address of the site administrator, or customer support desk. To get support: 1. On the toolbar, click the Contact button. Your default client is opened with the address populated. 2. Enter the details of your problem and send the . Chapter 3. Viewing performance results 55

66 Customizing your KPI iews Use these options to customize your KPI iews on the portal. Setting your preferred KPI iew Select a preferred KPI iew to display when you first log in to the portal. Use the Go to Preferred View button on the toolbar to return to that KPI iew at any time. Before you begin If you hae permission to use this option, the Set Preferred View and Go to Preferred View buttons are aailable on the toolbar. A date offset is saed depending on the offset between the date selected and the current date. Each time the preferred KPI iew is run, it runs for the same relatie date. Any sort and filter options are saed with the preferred KPI iew. To set a preferred iew: 1. Open a KPI iew and set your period. 2. Click the Set Preferred View button on the toolbar. This KPI iew displays when you log in to the portal. 3. Optional: At any time, click the Go to Preferred View button on the toolbar to go directly to this KPI iew. Working with thresholds Use thresholds to help you to analyze trends in your results and to see whether alues are exceeding specified limits. Before you begin A threshold is a alue that is compared against metrics to determine whether any metrics exceed or drop below a specific constraint. Thresholds are supported in the following reports: Group Summary Table (GST) Resource Oer Threshold Table (RTT) Time Series If you hae permission to use this option, the Thresholds button is aailable in the toolbar. The threshold iolation types are Burst, Period, Risk, and Baseline. Each type is represented by a different icon. In the toolbar, the currently selected threshold type is indicated by the appropriate icon. You can only apply the threshold iolation types for which you hae permission. Your selection is applied to the current report only. To see a particular type of threshold information for the current report: 56 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

67 Adanced report functionality 1. Click the arrow on Threshold button to see the aailable threshold iolation types. 2. Choose a threshold iolation type from the list. Certain reports hae additional functionality that you can access or configure directly from the portal. User-editable RST reports In RST reports, you can edit properties designated as user-editable while iewing the results on the portal. If you hae permission to edit properties through RST reports, an Edit button is aailable in the upper right-hand corner of the report next to the Info link. Click the Edit button to put the report in Edit Mode. When in Edit Mode, Sae and Cancel buttons are aailable. The following figure shows an RST in Edit Mode: Features of Edit Mode When a user-editable report is in Edit Mode the following conditions apply: Sorting is disabled. You cannot drill down to resource-specific reports. The Tab and Enter keys are managed by the browser. The Sae button submits all modifications made to any property alues, returns to View Mode, and refreshes the report. Pressing the Enter key while the cursor is in an editable text field performs the same actions as clicking the Sae button. Clicking the Cancel button discards any modifications made and returns to View Mode. Using the browser refresh page feature resets all unsaed modifications made, and displays the unedited page again. Naigating to any other web page by any method discards all unsaed modifications made. For properties designated by the content designer as Boolean, a global check box is shown. If selected, the corresponding property is set to the string "yes" for all resources listed in the table, and the indiidual check box for each resource is checked. If you clear the global check box, it clears all indiidual check boxes and sets the corresponding property string to "no." Chapter 3. Viewing performance results 57

68 Edits in text fields are erified as the cursor leaes the text field. Your edits are erified against the property type specified for the property by the content designer, as follows: If the editable property is designated a string type, your entry must be no longer than 255 characters, and each character must be in the UTF-8 character set. If the editable property is designated an integer type, only the numerals 0-9 are allowed. If the editable property is designated a decimal type, then numerals plus a period are allowed, and the period is required. That is, a decimal entry must be of the form: nnnnnnn.nnnnnn Any edit field entry failing these alidation tests results in an error message when the cursor leaes the edit field. Integer and decimal type fields must be in the range: 0 < n < ( ) Exiting or naigating away from Edit Mode When you click the Sae button, you are prompted for confirmation to sae all entered alues. Click Cancel to remain in Edit Mode. Click OK to sae all changes to the Netcool/Proiso database. A message confirms a successful database update. If one or more of your edits could not be saed, the Some changes were not saed message is displayed. Carefully examine the report in View Mode to determine which edits were not successfully stored, and make those edits again. Note: If you make many edits on a report, and one or more edits fails its database update, the system cannot distinguish which edits failed and which succeeded. For this reason, consider making a few edits at a time, clicking the Sae button, then returning to Edit Mode to continue making edits. Note: If you make edits to a report while another user is editing the same report, Netcool/Proiso detects any conflict in resource-property pairs, disallows the edits from both users, and displays the message Some changes were not saed. If you naigate away from the report with unsaed changes, a dialog box warns you that your changes are discarded if you continue. Click OK to discard your changes and naigate to another page. Click Cancel to remain in Edit Mode. Important: Changes to properties from the portal might be oerwritten by the Netcool/Proiso proisioning system. This oerwriting might occur, for example, if an administrator installs a Technology Pack update that contains modified reporter parameters for the RST report that you edited, or if the editable property is populated by a Discoery formula or resmgr command update. Important: If you notice that properties are being oerwritten, contact your administrator or IBM Support immediately. 58 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

69 Related concepts User-editable features of RST reports on page 15 Support for user-editable properties on page 205 Working with real-time charts Real-time charts proide a real-time iew of performance metrics. Real-time charts are actiated from static (on-demand) charts that hae been enabled with real-time capability. Before you begin Real-time charts hae a link for actiating and deactiating real-time capability. The link text can be customized by the content designer. Note: To display a real-time chart, you must hae the Jaa runtime enironment (JRE) installed. If not already installed, you are prompted to install the JRE the first time you access a real-time chart in your browser. You can download the JRE from In this procedure, the link text is Open Real Time Window and on demand. You can perform the following tasks on real-time charts: 1. To actiate a real-time chart, click Open Real Time Window. The chart is actiated in a new window, and the link text changes to on demand. 2. To close the real-time chart, click on demand. 3. To change the data presentation: a. Right-click the real-time chart and b. Choose the Plot, Scatter-plot, Area, orbar option. 4. To change the polling rate: a. Right-click the real-time chart. b. Select the Set polling rate option. c. Enter a polling rate in seconds. More SNMP network traffic is generated. For security reasons, the maximum polling period allowed is 10 minutes (600 seconds). 5. To change the time range: a. Right-click the real-time chart. b. Select the Set window time range option. c. Enter a time range in minutes. 6. To pause a real-time chart, click the Pause button. The RealTime is frozen!!! (click Start) message displays. 7. To restart a real-time chart when paused, click the Play button. 8. To stop a real-time chart, click the Stop button. The Subscription stopped!!! (click Init) message displays. 9. To restart a real-time chart when stopped, click the Init button. Chapter 3. Viewing performance results 59

70 Changing time series granularity This option changes the granularity of the data displayed in group and resource time series line charts. Changes to data granularity affect all charts that permit you to change the granularity. Before you begin If you hae permission to change time series granularity, the Edit button is aailable in the upper right-hand corner of the Resource View Results pane. To change your permissions, contact your administrator. Note: Daily and weekly group time series charts do not support the raw data granularity option. To change the granularity: 1. Select a time series line chart. 2. From the toolbar, click the edit button. 3. Specify the granularity from the supported granularities: Option Daily Description raw 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes 1 hour Weekly Daily 2, 4, 6, 12 hours 1 day Monthly 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours 1 day 1 week Quarterly 1 day 1 week Yearly Quarterly 1 month 14 Monthly 1 day 1 week 1 year 4. Refresh the portal to display the report with the new data granularity. 60 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

71 Changing data granularity from raw to hourly This example shows two time series charts where the data granularity has been changed from raw to hourly. Related concepts Changing granularity and granularity precedence on page 37 Related tasks Configuring time series granularity for a user on page 91 Viewing a Search report Use search reports to find instances of any of the search items that are configured by the content designer. Before you begin You can only search on the items configured. Search reports support multiple * wildcard characters. To use the search report: 1. Enter any alphanumeric string in the field under a search heading. 2. Press the Enter key or click the Search button. 3. Optional: Click any heading to sort your results in ascending or descending order. 4. Optional: Drill down further into the data by clicking any link in the results. Drill downs are recursie. Chapter 3. Viewing performance results 61

72 Viewing a Diagnostic report The diagnostic report helps you to understand why a resource is not operating correctly. A diagnostic report proides troubleshooting information about network resources, showing the main configuration attributes of a resource (group/bse/cse). Before you begin If you hae permission to use this option, the Diagnose button is aailable in the toolbar. At the topmost leel, a diagnostic report is made up of the following four tables: Current Resource Current Resource Metric Counts Parents of the Current Resource Children of the Current Resource To use a diagnostic report: 1. Select the report that you want to diagnose. 2. In the toolbar, click the Diagnose button. Diagnostic report drill downs Drilling down on a metric in a diagnostic report proides you with detailed information about the formulas used to calculate the metric. Drill downs are recursie. If you click a Parent Name or Child Name link, you are brought to the top-leel report for that resource. If, howeer, you click a link under the Metric Name column, you are brought to a special diagnostic page that proides detailed information about the formulas used to derie that metric. A formula diagnostic report is made up of the following tables: Current Resource Note: This table contains the same information as the Current Resource Table in the top-leel report. Formula of the Metric Being Ealuated Two formula dependency tables: Dependant Formulas (CME Formulas) Note: This table is only populated if the formula being ealuated is a CME formula that depends on one or more formulas. Dependant Formulas (Generic Formulas) Note: The formulas listed here can proide information to the formula under ealuation. This table is only populated if the formula being ealuated is a generic formula that depends on one or more formulas or if the current resource is not a group. 62 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

73 Requests Note: This table lists any requests that the formula under ealuation uses. This table can be empty if the formula under ealuation is a generic formula. This table is empty if the current resource is a group. In addition to the duplicated resource information, the tables in the formula diagnostic report contain the new information shown in this table. Formula of the Metric Being Ealuated Dependant Formulas (CME Formulas) Dependant Formulas (Generic Formulas) Column Formula Name ID Type Expression Formula Path (Formulas-only) Polling Period (Request-only) State Date of Last Action Last Action Origin User Requests Description The name of the formula being ealuated. The Netcool/Proiso internal identifier for the formula. The type of formula. Possible alues are cfl, DVF, property, relation, orsnmp. The type of expression. Possible alues are delta and fixed. Where the formula can be found in the formula hierarchy. The rate at which the deice is queried for the metric. The state of the formula. Can be either on or off. The date and time of the last action performed on the formula. The last action performed on the formula before the start-time of the report and all actions that occurred during the reporting period. Possible alues are Delete, Insert, or Update. The name of the operation or component. The name of the user that performed the action. Scheduled Reports Scheduled reports run at specified times and can be automatically sent by to a user or a mailing list or posted to an FTP site. If you hae permission to use this option, the Schedule Reports button is aailable in the toolbar. Scheduled reports allow you to share results with stakeholders without requiring them to log in to the portal. Before you can schedule reports, an administrator must configure the scheduler and grant you access. Chapter 3. Viewing performance results 63

74 Scheduling a report Use the Scheduler to send or receie regular updates. Before you begin An administrator can limit the number of tasks that you can schedule. Ensure that you know the scheduler task limit for your installation. You do not receie any warning if you exceed the scheduler task limit. If you exceed the limit, reports up to the limit are included, the remaining reports are excluded. To schedule reports to run at a specified time: 1. On the toolbar, click the Schedule This Report button to add the current report to the list of reports to be managed. The DataView Scheduler opens in a new browser window and displays the Edit Layout tab. 2. Following the hints that display in the Helpful Hints field and by using the HTML tools, design a page for your scheduled report. 3. Click the remaining three tabs in sequence to complete the configuration, and follow the hints and the embedded help. Note the following information: The expected date format is YYYY/MM/DD. A Scheduler task cannot be assigned the name Untitled. On any tab, confirm your selections by clicking the Sae Changes button. The Scheduler task can be saed only after all appropriate selections hae been made on the Edit Layout, Schedule Tasks, and Select Recipients tabs. On the Manage Tasks tab, you can yourself a report for test purposes by clicking the Run Task Once button and completing the Scheduler Run Task window. On the Manage Tasks tab, you can choose to enclose a Report Execution Log in the . The report execution log contains a history trace, and is intended for the internal user only, most often the system administrator. On the Manage Tasks tab, the current state of a scheduled report is listed in the Status column. The following states are supported: Option Actie Assigned In Process Stopping Suspended Description Task is actie but is not assigned to a Scheduler for execution. All tasks must be actiated before they can be processed by the Scheduler. The Scheduler has placed this task in the execution queue. Execution of the task has started or is in the processing stage. Reports are being rendered and added to a document, s are being sent, and so on. The Scheduler is in the process of stopping the task. Either the user has stopped the task or the Scheduler is forcing the task to stop. The task is not scheduled for execution and neer runs. 64 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

75 4. Click Exit to leae the DataView Scheduler and return to the portal page. 5. Optional: To configure the DataView Scheduler without adding a report, click the Manage Reports button on the toolbar. Verifying scheduled reports before deliery You can erify reports before sending them to customers or colleagues. Before you begin For example, as an account manager you can hae reports sent to you first, so that you can then check and modify the report content before sending the reports to a customer by or FTP link. To erify reports before deliery, follow these steps: 1. Schedule a consolidated report for deliery, specifying yourself as the recipient. 2. Access your account to see the report. You receie a notification from the Netcool/Proiso system administrator with a heading such as the following: PROVISO Alert! Scheduled report taskname_frequency is ready! 3. When you open the containing the scheduled report, you see a message like the following: A Consolidated Report has been prepared for you. A ZIP archie file may be attached to this , or an FTP link to the file may be proided below, depending on the deliery options configured for you by the report owner. Once retrieed, the following steps describe how to extract files from the ZIP archie and iew the final report. 1) Extract the files in the ZIP file to the directory where you want the files stored. The report image files are placed in a subdirectory named /images. 2) Double-click the consolidated report's.doc file to open it. Larger files can take up to 60 seconds to open. The inclusion of the text RO in the.zip file name, for example RO_, indicates a run-once task rather than a scheduled task. 4. To see the report, either use the FTP link (if included) or open the attached.zip file. 5. Optional: Modify as necessary. 6. Manually send the report to the customer by using one of the following methods: Moe the file to an FTP-enabled directory that the customer can access and send an to the customer with download instructions. the file to the customer as an attachment. Chapter 3. Viewing performance results 65

76 Viewing consolidated reports When you receie consolidated reports in , the can contain a.zip file that contains Microsoft Word or Adobe PDF ersions of the consolidated reports or a link to a.zip file on an FTP site. Before you begin If a PDF serer is configured, consolidated reports are deliered in PDF format. Otherwise, Microsoft Word format is used. To see a consolidated report, follow these steps: 1. Sae the.zip file by doing one of the following: If the consolidated report is on an FTP site, click the FTP link in the and sae the.zip file on your system. If the.zip file is attached to the , sae the.zip file on your system. 2. Naigate to the location of the.zip file and open it. The.zip file contains a report file and images. 3. Ensure that the User folder names option is selected in the.zip file, then extract all the files to your system. 4. Naigate to the extract directory. 5. To see the consolidated report, open the.doc file in the top-leel extract directory. The.doc file is an HTML document rendered in Microsoft Word. When you open the file, Microsoft Word conerts the contents to a self-contained Microsoft Word document. The report images contained in the document are referenced files; they are not embedded in the document. You must embed the images into the document and sae the file. 6. To embed the referenced images and create a Microsoft Word document, follow these steps: a. In Microsoft Word, select Edit Links. b. Select all the image files in the Source file pane and select the Sae picture in document check box. c. Click OK to link the images into the document. d. To sae the report as a Microsoft Word document, select File Sae As, and select Word Document (*.doc) from the Sae as type menu. Troubleshooting the Scheduler You can perform the following checks if the Scheduler is not working as expected. If the Scheduler is not working as expected, check the following: Was the Scheduler task saed after the task was fully defined? A Scheduler task can be saed only after all appropriate selections hae been made on the Edit Layout, Schedule Tasks, and Select Recipients tabs. Was the Scheduler task named Untitled? Untitled is an inalid name for a Scheduler task. If you cannot find the saed scheduled report, are you looking for the correct names? For information, see the format for the names of scheduled report files as defined for the FTP Base Directory and NFS Base Directory options. 66 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

77 Is the Scheduler configured correctly? Hae you exceeded the Scheduler task limit? Changing your address If aailable, you can use this option to change your current address. Before you begin This option is only aailable if enabled by an administrator. This address is also used by Tioli Netcool Performance Manager for your scheduled reports. To change your address: 1. In the Tioli Integrated Portal naigation, click Settings Change your Enter a alid address and click Set Address. Chapter 3. Viewing performance results 67

78 68 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

79 Chapter 4. Administration tasks Logging in to the console Configure access, priileges, and permissions for Netcool/Proiso users and administrators by using a number of tasks in the console. Log in to the console wheneer you want to start a work session. Before you begin The Tioli Integrated Portal Serer must be running before you can connect to it from your browser. To start the administratie console: 1. Open a browser window. 2. Enter either of the following URLs of the application serer: (if it is configured for secure access) where localhost is the fully qualified host name or IP address of the application serer (such as MySerer.MySubdomain.MyDomain.com or ) is the default nonsecure port number for the administratie console, and is the default secure port number. If your enironment was configured with a port number other than the default, enter that number instead. If you are not sure of the port number, read the application serer profile to get the correct number. 3. In the login page, enter your user ID and password, and click Log in. This is the user ID and the password that are stored with the Tioli Integrated Portal Serer. Results After your user credentials hae been erified, the console Welcome page is displayed. If you entered the localhost or port number incorrectly, the URL does not resole. View the application serer profile to check the settings for localhost, port, and user ID. What to do next Select any of the items in the naigation tree to begin working with the console. While you are logged into the administratie console, aoid clicking the browser Back button to go to the preious Web page because you will be logged out automatically. Click Forward and you will see that you are logged out and must resubmit your credentials to log in again. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

80 Administering the serer Perform these tasks to administer the serer. Stopping and starting the application serer The Tioli Integrated Portal Serer starts automatically after it has been installed and wheneer the computer is started. You can manually stop the serer before beginning certain configuration tasks or as needed. 1. On the command-line interface, change to the <install_dir>\tip\profiles\ TIPProfile\bin\ directory. 2. To stop the serer type the following command: stopserer serer1 -username tipadmin -password mypassword Where tipadmin is the administrator user ID and mypassword is the administrator password. Wait a moment for the serer to completely shut down. 3. To start the serer, type the following command: startserer serer1 -username tipadmin -password mypassword Where tipadmin is the administrator user ID and mypassword is the administrator password. Related tasks Configuring the DataView Scheduler on page 95 Related reference The configure command on page 102 Port assignments The application serer requires a set of sequentially numbered ports. The first port in the sequence is supplied during installation when the administratie console profile is configured. The installer checks that the port is aailable before assigning it. If one of the ports is already in use, the installer tries another port range until one is aailable. If these attempts fail, you are prompted to enter another port number. There is no indication of the change in port numbers until you attempt to log in to the administratie console with the port number shown in the Install Complete window. If the URL is not found, reiew the port number assignments in the application serer profile to ensure that you are using the right number. Viewing the application serer profile Open the application serer profile to reiew the port number assignments and other information. The profile of the application serer is aailable as a text file on the computer where the serer is installed. 70 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

81 1. Locate the <install_dir>\profiles\tipinstallwebtopitnm\logs directory. 2. Open AboutThisProfile.txt in a text editor. Example The following example shows the profile for an installation as it appears in <install_dir>\profiles\tipinstallwebtopitnm\logs AboutThisProfile.txt: Application serer enironment to create: Application serer Location: C:\IBM\tioli\tip\profiles\TIPProfile Disk space required: 200 MB Profile name: TIPProfile Make this profile the default: True Node name: TIPNode Host name: tioliadmin.usca.ibm.com Enable administratie security (recommended): True Administratie consoleport: Administratie console secure port: HTTP transport port: HTTPS transport port: Bootstrap port: SOAP connector port: Run application serer as a serice: False Create a Web serer definition: False What to do next If you want to see the complete list of defined ports on the application serer, you can open <install_dir>\properties\tipportdef.properties in a text editor. #Create the required WAS port properties for TIP #Mon Oct 06 09:26:30 PDT 2008 CSIV2_SSL_SERVERAUTH_LISTENER_ADDRESS=16323 WC_adminhost=16315 DCS_UNICAST_ADDRESS=16318 BOOTSTRAP_ADDRESS=16312 SAS_SSL_SERVERAUTH_LISTENER_ADDRESS=16321 SOAP_CONNECTOR_ADDRESS=16313 ORB_LISTENER_ADDRESS=16320 WC_defaulthost_secure=16311 CSIV2_SSL_MUTUALAUTH_LISTENER_ADDRESS=16322 WC_defaulthost=16310 WC_adminhost_secure=16316 Administering users, roles, and groups To enable users to access and use Tioli Netcool Performance Manager, you must add a user, assign them an appropriate role, and configure their preferences. Adding a user Create a user in the Tioli Integrated Portal. Depending on the roles they are assigned, these users can access one or more products in the Tioli Integrated Portal. Assigning a role to each user Assign a role to a user in the Tioli Integrated Portal. To access Tioli Netcool Performance Manager, a user must be assigned a Tioli Netcool Performance Manager role. Configure Tioli Netcool Performance Manager preferences Configure report access and priileges for Tioli Netcool Performance Manager users. Users cannot access Tioli Netcool Performance Manager functionality unless they exist as users in the Tioli Netcool Performance Chapter 4. Administration tasks 71

82 Manager database. If the user exists in the database, their preferences are modified. If the user does not exist, a user is created in the database. Default user groups and roles The default tnpmuser and tnpmadministrator roles are defined during the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager installation. The default tnpmusers and tnpmadministrators user groups are created to contain these users. All users with the tnpmuser role are added to the tnpmusers user group, and all users with the tnpmadministrators role are added to the tnpmadministrators user group. You must assign users to one of these roles to enable them to use Tioli Netcool Performance Manager: tnpmuser A standard user who iews resource performance in the GUI, and who can create or receie scheduled performance reports. The tnpmuser has these default permissions: Viewing resource performance and reports. Managing personal time-series granularity preferences. tnpmadministrator An administrator who can configure and administer the serer and has all permissions by default. Administer Tioli Netcool Performance Manager users (all sections). Configure Tioli Netcool Performance Manager user preferences and priileges. For example, configure the report groups that a user can access. Configure Tioli Netcool Performance Manager settings (all sections). Creating a Tioli Integrated Portal user Create a user and assign the user to the appropriate Tioli Netcool Performance Manager user group or administrator group. Before you begin Log in to Tioli Integrated Portal as an administrator. Creating or deleting a user by using the Manage Users task applies only to the Tioli Integrated Portal serer and not to the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager database. When you modify preferences for a user by using the User Preference Management page, the database is checked for that user. If the user exists in the database, their preferences are modified. If the user does not exist, a user is created in the database. To delete a user from the database, use the resmgr command. To create a user and assign the user to the user group or administrator group: 72 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

83 1. In the console naigation, select Users and Groups Manage Users. 2. Click Create. 3. Type a user ID and the user details. 4. Click Create. The user is created and the message The user was created successfully. is displayed. 5. Click Close. What to do next Assign a Tioli Netcool Performance Manager role to the user. Related reference The configure command on page 102 Assigning a Tioli Netcool Performance Manager role to a user Assign Tioli Netcool Performance Manager roles to a Tioli Integrated Portal user to proide the user with the appropriate access permissions. Assigning this role automatically adds the user to the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager users group or administrators group as appropriate. Before you begin Log in to Tioli Integrated Portal as an administrator. To assign the appropriate role to a user or administrator. 1. In the console naigation, select Users and Groups Administratie User Roles. 2. To assign a role to a user, click Add. 3. In the User field, type a user ID. 4. In the Roles list, select the appropriate role: tnpmusers tnpmadministrators 5. Click OK. 6. To sae your changes to the master configuration, in the Messages list, click Sae. The user can now log in to the console. What to do next Configure preferences for the user by using the User Preferences Management page. This step ensures that the user is added to the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager database. Related concepts User Preference Management on page 86 Chapter 4. Administration tasks 73

84 Create multiple users As administrator, you can create users and grant them the appropriate priileges by using the command-line interface. You can script these commands to generate multiple user accounts with minimal user interaction. Use these commands to: Create a user in the Tioli Integrated Portal and enable that user to log in and access Tioli Netcool Performance Manager pages. Create a user in the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager database and authorize access to reporting groups and reporting features. Creating multiple Tioli Integrated Portal users Create multiple Tioli Integrated Portal users, and grant them access to the Tioli Integrated Portal and Tioli Netcool Performance Manager pages. Run the following commands on the computer where the Tioli Integrated Portal serer is running. These commands create a Tioli Integrated Portal user, assign an appropriate role to the user and grant access to Tioli Netcool Performance Manager pages within Tioli Integrated Portal. You can then script these commands to create multiple users. By default, Tioli Integrated Portal is installed in the /opt/ibm/tioli/tip directory. 1. To create a Tioli Integrated Portal user, enter the following command: tip_location/bin/wsadmin.sh lang jython user tip_admin_user -password tip_admin_password -c AdminTask.createUser('[-uid user_name -password user_password -confirmpassword user_password -cn user_first_name -sn user_second_name -mail user_ _address]') 2. To assign an appropriate role to the Tioli Integrated Portal user, allowing the user to log in and perform Tioli Netcool Performance Manager tasks: tip_location/bin/wsadmin.sh lang jython user tip_admin_user -password tip_admin_password -c AdminTask.mapUsersToAdminRole('[-rolename tnpmuser -userids user_name]') 3. To add the Tioli Integrated Portal user to a group, allowing the user to access Tioli Netcool Performance Manager pages in the Tioli Integrated Portal, enter the appropriate command: Default file-based repository example: tip_location/bin/wsadmin.sh lang jython user tip_admin_user -password tip_admin_password -c AdminTask.addMemberToGroup('[-memberUniqueName uid=user_name,o=defaultwimfilebasedrealm -groupuniquename cn=tnpmusers,o=defaultwimfilebasedrealm]') LDAP repository example: tip_location/bin/wsadmin.sh lang jython user tip_admin_user -password tip_admin_password -c AdminTask.addMemberToGroup('[-memberUniqueName uid=user_name,ou=people,dc=serer,dc=company,dc=com -groupuniquename cn=tnpmusers,ou=groups,dc=serer,dc=company,dc=com]') 4. To sae the user configuration, enter the following command: tip_location/bin/wsadmin.sh lang jython user tip_admin_user -password tip_admin_password -c AdminConfig.sae() 5. On the command-line interface, change to the tip_location/profiles/ TIPProfile/bin/ directory. 74 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

85 6. To stop and start the Tioli Integrated Portal serer, enter the following commands: stopserer serer1 -username tip_administrator_username -password tip_adminintrator_password startserer serer1 -username tip_administrator_username -password tip_adminintrator_password Creating multiple Tioli Netcool Performance Manager users For each Tioli Integrated Portal user, create a user with the same name in the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager database to allow that user to run reports. Run the commands on the computer where DataMart is running. SSSW\\ is an artifact from the preious SilerStream enironment and must be prefixed to the user name. The backslash (\) is a special character in UNIX, so it must be escaped (that is, SSSW\\ --> SSSW\\\\). By default, DataMart is installed in the /opt/datamart directory. 1. To create a user in the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager database, enter the following command: resmgr import rusr colnames name line SSSW\\\\user_name 2. To grant the user access to a reporting group, enter the following command: resmgr import linkgroupse_ru colnames npath rusr.name line group_path _ SSSW\\\\user_name _ 3. To set optional user properties or priileges, enter the following command: resmgr -import rusr -colnames "rusr.name ruprp.name ruprp.alue" -line SSSW\\\\user _ user_property_name _ user_property_alue _ " DataView user properties The following table contains the DataView user properties that you can use with the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager command-line commands. Parameter DV_UserResourceName DV_UserProfile DV_UserShowCurrentPeriod Description Defines which subelement (SE) name definitions are used for the SE labels that are displayed to a particular user. Valid settings are: 1 - Use the internal ALIAS field alues of the SE (SE Labels). 2 - Use the internal NAME field alues of the SE Use the alue defined in the customerfacingname property for each SE. Defines the general user type for control of certain security options. Valid settings are: NOC - Network Operations Center user, few restrictions. PSLA - Proactie Serice Leel Agreement personnel, moderate leel of restriction. SLA - Users, highest leel of restriction. Controls access to actie-period report iewing. If undefined or set to true, the user is allowed to iew reports for the current, actie, time period. If set to false, the user cannot iew reports for the current period. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 75

86 Parameter DV_UserProbeConfigAccess DV_UserProbeFileConfigAccess DV_UserAccessScheduler DV_UserGranularitySetting DV_UserUpdateProperty DV_UserProbeWriteMemAccess DV_UserEnablePDFLink DV_UserSererConfigurationAccess DV_UserAdhocAccess DV_UserCleanCSVResultSet DV_ReceieCREnable DV_UserEnableFaoriteLink DV_UserWelcomeReporter DV_UserTroubleShootingReport Description Valid settings are: read-write - the user has access to all probe configuration and management functionality. read-only - The user can access the configuration/management GUIs, but they cannot sae, modify or delete any probes by using the GUI. null (or other alue) - the user is restricted from iewing either GUI. Valid settings are: read-write - the user has access to the file-based probe configuration functionality. read-only - The user can access the file-based probe configuration GUIs, but they cannot sae, modify or delete any probes by using the GUI. null (or other alue) - the user is restricted from iewing the GUI. Property that allows access to the scheduler tool. Valid settings are true or false. Allows a user to access the granularity setting section of their preference page, if set to true. User has priileges to update properties in RSTs if set to true. Gies access to the writemem button in the Probe management configuration page, if set to true. Allows a user to access the PDF Report link. Valid settings are true or false. DataView user-scope property that allows a user to access the Configuration link. Valid settings true or false. If set to true, the user has access to Ad-hoc periods for time series charts. The default alue is false. If set to true, then the CSV result set returned to the user is a cleaned-up ersion. The default alue is false. If set to true, the user receies consolidated reports. The default alue is false. Gie access to faorite report feature if set to true. Specify the user welcome page. The alue of the property must be set to the reporter ID of the welcome page. Set the user diagnostic report. the alue of the property must be set to the reporter ID of the diagnostic report. The default diagnostic report ID is IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

87 Managing users You can perform tasks that help you manage users. What to do next From the left naigation pane, click Manage Users. Before you can perform some tasks for users, you must first search for existing users that match the search criteria that you specify. After the search completes, a table displays the users that match your search criteria. To manage users, you can perform these tasks: Searching for users You can search for existing users that match the search criteria that you specify. 1. From the naigation pane, click Manage Users. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more users. For example, select User ID. 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of users, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all users. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 5. Click Search. After the search completes, a table displays the users that match your search criteria. Creating users You can create one or more users. The users are added to the registry and a login account for each new user is automatically created. When creating the new user, you can also add the user as a member of one or more groups. 1. Complete the steps in Searching for users. 2. Click Create to create a new user. 3. In the User ID field, type a unique name to identify the user. This user ID will be added to the user registry and also will be used as the login account name. For example, you might type dlucas 4. Optional: Click Group Membership and then follow the steps in Changing group membership for a user on page 78 to add the user as a member of one or more existing groups. 5. In the First name field, type the gien or first name of the user. For example, you might type Diana 6. In the Last name field, type the family or last name of the user. For example, you might type Lucas 7. Optional: In the field, type an address for the user. For example, you might type dlucas@tioli.com 8. In the Password field, type a unique password. For example, you might type d4lucas. 9. In the Confirm password field, type the same password again. 10. Click Create. If successful, a message will display that indicates that the user has been created. Also, the user ID and other user information will be added to the user registry, and a new login account will be created for the user. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 77

88 11. To create another user, click Create Another. 12. Repeat the process until all the new users hae been created. Changing group membership for a user You can search for and list the existing groups that match the search criteria. When creating a new user, you can choose the groups from the search results list in which you want the user to be a member. 1. During the process of Creating users on page 77, click Group Membership. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more users. For example, select Group name. 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 5. Click Search. After the search completes, the results are displayed in two lists: one list is for groups that matched the search criteria and one list, named Current Groups, is for groups that the user is already a member. 6. To add the user to one or more groups, highlight the groups from the matching groups list to select them. For example, you might highlight ibmaustin01 and ibmaustin02 and then click < Add. 7. Optional: To undo or remoe the user as a member, highlight the groups from the Current Groups list and then click Remoe >. 8. Return to the process of Creating users on page 77 to complete the steps. Viewing information about a user You can iew information about a specific user. 1. From the naigation pane, click Manage Users. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more users. For example, select User ID. 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of users, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all users. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 5. Click Search. After the search completes, the users that match your search criteria are displayed as hypertext links. 6. Click on one of the user links to iew information about the selected user. You can only iew the information, you cannot change it. 7. Click Cancel after iewing to return to the preious window. Viewing the groups the user is a member of You can iew a list of existing groups that the specified user is currently a member of. 78 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

89 1. From the naigation pane, click Manage Users. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more users. For example, select User ID. 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of users, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all users. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 5. Click Search. After the search completes, a table displays a list of groups, as hypertext links, that match your search criteria. 6. Click the group name link to see the user properties. 7. Click the Groups tab to see the list of groups, in ascending order, that the user is currently a member of. Adding a user to groups You can add a user as a member to selected groups. 1. Complete the steps in Viewing the groups the user is a member of on page Confirm that the user in the User ID field is the user that you want to add to more groups. 3. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more groups. For example, select Group name. 4. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of users, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all users. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 5. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 6. Click Search. After the search completes, a list is displayed of the groups that match your search criteria. 7. Highlight one or more groups to select them, and click Add. Remoing a user from other groups After searching for the groups in which the user is currently a member, you can remoe the user from membership in groups that you select. 1. Complete the steps in Viewing the groups the user is a member of on page Confirm that the user in the User ID field is the user that you want to remoe from other groups. 3. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more groups. For example, select Group name. 4. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 79

90 5. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 6. Click Search to begin the search. After the search completes, a table displays the groups that match your search criteria. 7. Select the check boxes next to one or more groups, and then click Remoe. Adding more users as members of a group You can add more users as members of a group. 1. After completing the steps in Viewing a list of members of a group on page 84, click Add Users. 2. Confirm that the Group name field displays the name of the group to which you want to add more users as members. 3. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search by. For example, select User ID. 4. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of users or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all users. 5. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 6. Click Search. After the search is complete, a list displays of the users that matched your search criteria. 7. Highlight one or more users in the list to select them, and then click Add. Duplicating group assignments for a user You can search for users that match your search criteria. After selecting one or more users, these users can be added as members of the same groups that another existing user is already a member of. For example, if all the members of a department need to belong to the same groups as the department manager, you can duplicate the groups that the manager belongs to for all the other users that you choose. 1. Complete the steps in Searching for users on page Select the check boxes next to one or more users that you want to assign the same membership as another group. 3. Choose the Duplicate Group Assignments action. 4. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more users. For example, select User ID. 5. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of users, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all users. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 6. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 7. Click Search. After the search has been completed, a table displays the users that match your search criteria. 8. Highlight the name of the user whose group membership you want to duplicate for the preiously selected users, and click OK. The group membership of the user is duplicated for the preiously selected users. 80 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

91 Deleting users You can search for and list the existing users that match your search criteria. After selecting one or more users, you can delete them and remoe their user IDs from the user registry. 1. From the naigation pane, click Manage Users. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more users. For example, select User ID. 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of users, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all users. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 5. Click Search. After the search completes, a table displays the users that match your search criteria. 6. Select the check boxes next to the users that you want to delete. 7. Click Delete. 8. Click Delete again when asked to confirm the deletion. The users are immediately deleted and remoed from the user registry. The table that lists the users is refreshed, and the selected users are no longer displayed in the list. Managing groups You can perform tasks that help you manage groups. What to do next From the left naigation pane, click Manage Groups. Before you can perform some tasks for groups, you must first search for existing groups that match the search criteria that you specify. After the search completes, a table displays the groups that match your search criteria. To manage groups, you can perform these tasks: Searching for groups You can search for existing groups that match the search criteria that you specify. 1. From the naigation pane, click Manage Groups. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more groups. For example, select Group name. 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 5. Click Search. After the search completes, a table is displayed that lists the group names that match your search criteria. Descriptions, if any, are also proided. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 81

92 Creating groups You can create one or more groups. The group names and descriptions are added to the user registry. 1. Complete the steps in Searching for groups on page Click Create to create a new groups. 3. In the Group name field, type a name to be used to identify the group. This group name will be added to the user registry. For example, you might type ibm 4. Optional: In the Description field, type a brief description for the group to distinguish this group from other groups. This description will be added to the user registry. The description must be an alphanumeric string with characters that are part of the local code set. For example, Users and groups, CNC Company Dept Click Create to add the group name and the description, if entered, to the user registry. If successful, a message displays indicating that the group has been created. 6. To create another group, click Create Another. 7. Repeat the process until all the new groups hae been created. Viewing information about a group You can iew information about a specific group. 1. From the naigation pane, click Manage Groups. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more groups. For example, select Group name. 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 5. Click Search. After the search completes, the groups that match your search criteria are displayed as hypertext links. 6. Click on one of the group name links to iew the information about the selected group. You can only iew the information, you cannot change it. 7. Click Cancel after iewing to return to the preious window. Changing information about a group You can change the information about a specific group. You can change the name of the group, add a new description for the group if none exits, or change the existing description. 1. From the naigation pane, click Manage Groups. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more groups. For example, select Group name. 82 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

93 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 5. Click Search. After the search completes, the groups that match your search criteria are displayed in the column as hypertext links. 6. Click on one of the group links to change information about the group, as needed. 7. Optional: In the Group name field, enter a different name for the group, if needed. 8. Optional: In the Description field, enter a different description that the existing description, or enter a new description if none currently exists, if needed. 9. To sae the changes, either click OK to sae and return to the preious window, or click Apply to sae but remain on the same window. Viewing the groups the group is a member of You can iew a list of existing groups that the specified group is currently a member of. 1. From the naigation pane, click Manage Groups. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more groups. For example, select Group name. 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit theset of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 5. Click Search. After the search completes, a table displays a list of groups, as hypertext links, that match your search criteria. 6. Click the group name link to see the group properties. 7. Click the Groups tab to see the list of groups, in ascending order, that the group is currently a member of. Adding a group to other groups Before you can add a group to other groups, you must first search for the groups in which you want the group to be a member. 1. Complete the steps in Viewing the groups the group is a member of. 2. Confirm that the group in the Group name field is the group that you want to add to other groups. 3. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more groups. For example, select Group name. 4. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search if for to limit the set of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 83

94 5. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 6. Click Search. After the search completes, a list is displayed of the groups that match your search criteria. 7. Highlight one or more groups to select them, and click Add. Viewing a list of members of a group You can search for a list of users and groups that are existing members of a specific group. 1. From the naigation pane, click Manage Groups. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more groups. For example, select Group names to locate groups by searching by their group names. 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 5. Click Search. After the search is complete, a table displays a list of the groups that match the search criteria. 6. Select the check box next to one group. 7. Click the Members tab to iew the users and groups that are existing members of the specified group. Icons are used to help distinguish a user from a group member. Adding more groups as members of a group After iewing the list of members in a group that you specify, you can add more groups. 1. After completing the steps in Viewing a list of members of a group, click Add Groups. 2. Confirm that the Group name field displays the name of the group to which you want to add more groups as members. 3. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search by. For example, select Group name. 4. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. 5. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 6. Click Search. After the search is complete, a list of the groups that matched your search criteria is displayed. 7. Highlight one or more groups in the list to select them, and then click Add. Remoing members from a group After searching for the list of members in a group that you specify, you can remoe users and groups as members from the group. 84 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

95 1. Complete the steps in Viewing a list of members of a group on page Confirm that the Group name field displays the name of the group from which you want to remoe members. 3. Select the check boxes next to one or more group members. 4. Click Remoe. 5. Click Remoe again when queried to confirm the remoal of the selected members from the group. The members are immediately remoed and are no longer displayed in the table. Duplicating group assignments for a group You can search for groups that match the search criteria that you specify. After selecting one or more groups, these groups can be members of the same groups as another existing group. For example, if all groups at the Austin site should belong to the same groups as an existing group, you can duplicate the groups that the one group belongs to for all the other groups that you choose. 1. Complete the steps in Searching for groups on page Select the check boxes next to one or more groups that you want to assign the same membership as another group. 3. Choose the Duplicate Group Assignments action. 4. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more groups. For example, select Group name. 5. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for to limit the set of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 6. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. 7. Click Search. After the search has been completed, a table displays the groups that match your search criteria. 8. Highlight the name of the group whose group whose group assignment is to be duplicated for the preiously selected groups, and click OK. The group membership of the group is duplicated for the preiously selected groups Deleting groups You can search for and list the existing group names that match the search criteria that you specify. After selecting one or more groups, you can delete them and remoe the group names from the user registry. 1. From the naigation pane, click Manage Groups. 2. In the Search by field, select the attribute from the list that you want to use to search for one or more groups. For example, select Group name. 3. In the Search for field, either type the string that you want to search for a limited set of groups, or use the wildcard character (*) to search for all groups. Whether the search is case sensitie or case insensitie depends on the user registry that you are using. 4. In the Maximum results field, specify the maximum number of search results that you want to display. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 85

96 5. Click Search. After the search completes, a table is displayed that lists the group names that match your search criteria. Descriptions, if any, are also proided. 6. Select the check boxes next to the groups that you want to delete. 7. Click Delete. 8. Click Delete again when asked to confirm the deletion. The groups are immediately deleted and remoed from the user registry. The table that lists the groups is refreshed, and the selected groups are no longer displayed in the list. User Preference Management Manage preferences for indiidual Tioli Netcool Performance Manager users by using the User Preference Management task. Related tasks Assigning a Tioli Netcool Performance Manager role to a user on page 73 Selecting a user in User Preference Management Select a user to configure their user preferences. To select a user: 1. Find a user: Filter the list of users by clicking in the Filter field and typing any characters from the User ID, First Name, Last Name, or address fields. Scroll through the list until you see the user. 2. Select the user: In the list, click the hyperlink in the User ID column. Select the check box for the user and click Configure. Resource grouping You must understand resource grouping in DataMart and how it relates to setting up users in Netcool/Proiso DataView. When you set up user access to reports, you associate the user with specific resource groups. This association lets the user see the reports deployed to that group. The resource groups that you associate with the user are generated in the DataMart component. The grouping technology automatically organizes networking data into a structure that makes it easier to manage the information about thousands (or millions) of resources. Grouping lets the Serice Proider (SP) managers unify data from disparate systems or resources, and allows data to be subdiided into groups to proide users with useful information. Summary of the grouping process You can group resources as follows: Perform an inentory of the network or import resources from the command line. Create any properties that are not included in DataMart, and add them to the database. 86 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

97 Note: After you create properties, you must close the Rule Editor and open it again to see the new properties. Create grouping rules. Run the Autogrouping option in the Inentory Tool Wizard to implement the grouping rules. Assigning access to resource groups If users hae access to a resource group, they can see the performance of that group and its subgroups. To assign access to a resource group to an indiidual user: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button. 3. Click Configure. 4. Select the Access tab. 5. Select the check box next to each resource group that you want to assign to the user. If the groups that you assign contains subgroups, all iews that belong to the group and associated subgroups are assigned to the user. 6. Click Apply. What to do next The next time that the user logs in, ensure that they can see the reports deployed to the resource group. Editing user priileges Select the priileges that you want to assign to an indiidual user. Assigning a profile to a user Assign a NOC, SLA, or PSLA profile to each user depending on their needs. Before you begin Decide what role is appropriate for the user: NOC, SLA, or PSLA. To assign a Tioli Netcool Performance Manager role to an indiidual user: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button for that user. 3. Click the Configure button. 4. Select the Priileges tab. 5. Expand the General category. 6. From the Profile list box, choose a profile. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 87

98 7. Click Apply. Related concepts User Profile Management on page 92 Configuring the resource name Configure the type of name that you want to apply to resources. This determines how you see resources in iews and reports. Before you begin The three main options for the resource name are as follows: Resource Name displays the name of the resource as stored in the database as a result of the data collection process. If you chose the NOC profile, Resource Label is automatically selected. Resource Label displays the alue of the label property as defined at proisioning time. You can choose to display a property from the list for the resource name. If you chose the SLA or PSLA profile, the customerfacingname property is automatically selected. To configure the resource name: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button for that user. 3. Click the Configure button. 4. Select the Priileges tab. 5. Expand the General category. 6. In the Resource Name list box, choose an option for the resource name. 7. Click Apply. Allowing a user to iew the current period Allow a user to select the current period in addition to the preious period. The current period is the current time according to the location of the user location and the period selected. To allow a user to iew the current period: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button for that user. 3. Click the Configure button. 4. Select the Priileges tab. 5. Expand the Priileges category. 6. Select the View Current Period check box. 88 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

99 7. Click Apply. What to do next Verify that the user can select the current period in KPI iews and reports. Allowing a user to access ad hoc iews Allow a user to access ad hoc iews. To allow a user to access ad hoc iews: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button for that user. 3. Click the Configure button. 4. Select the Priileges tab. 5. Expand the Priileges category. 6. Select the Access adhoc reports check box. 7. Click Apply. Allowing a user to create PDF reports When you allow a user to create PDF reports, the View as PDF button is displayed on the Defined Network Resources iew. To allow a user to create PDF reports: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button for that user. 3. Click Configure. 4. Select the Priileges tab. 5. Expand the Priileges category. 6. Select the Create PDF reports check box. 7. Click Apply. Allow a user to set a preferred iew Allow a user to set their preferred KPI iew. A date offset is saed depending on the offset between the date selected and the current date. Each time the preferred iew is run, it runs for the same relatie date. Any sort and filter options are saed with the preferred KPI iew. To allow a user to set a preferred KPI iew: Chapter 4. Administration tasks 89

100 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button for that user. 3. Click Configure. 4. Select the Priileges tab. 5. Expand the Priileges category. 6. Select the Set and iew preferred KPI iew check box. 7. Click Apply. Configuring IP SLA probes Allow a user to configure IP SLA probes. To allow a user to configure IP SLA probes: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button for that user. 3. Click Configure. 4. Select the Priileges tab. 5. Expand the Priileges category. 6. Select the Configure IP SLA probes or Configure IP SLA probes with a file check box. 7. Click Apply. Allow a user to schedule reports Allow a user to schedule reports. To allow a user to schedule reports: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button for that user. 3. Click Configure. 4. Select the Priileges tab. 5. Expand the Priileges category. 6. Select the Schedule Reports check box. 7. Click Apply. Allowing a user to update property alues in RST reports Allow a user to update property alues in RST reports. Allow a user to update property alues in RST reports: 90 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

101 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button for that user. 3. Click Configure. 4. Select the Priileges tab. 5. Expand the Priileges category. 6. Select the Update property alues in RST reports check box. 7. Click Apply. Allow a user to see diagnostic reports Use the DataMart resmgr command to allow a user to see diagnostic reports. 1. On the DataMart serer, log in as pmuser or any user with access rights to DataMart. 2. Open a terminal window. 3. Change to the path where DataMart is installed. For example: cd /opt/datamart 4. Ensure that your enironment is set by entering../datamart.en. 5. Enter the resmgr command with the following syntax: resmgr -import rusr -colnames "rusr.name ruprp.dbindex ruprp.name ruprp.alue" -line "SSSW\\\\ <username> _ _ DV_UserTroubleShootingReport _ _ " Where <username> is the name of the user to hae access to the Diagnostic Report. Configuring time series granularity for a user Configure the time series granularity for each period type for this user only. To configure the time series granularity: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Preference Management. 2. Find the user in the list of users and select the radio button for that user. 3. Click Configure. 4. Select the Priileges tab. 5. Expand the Time Series Granularity pane. 6. Optional: Select the check box to allow this user to modify the time series granularity. 7. Choose the appropriate alues for each period. 8. Click Apply. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 91

102 User Profile Management Related concepts Changing granularity and granularity precedence on page 37 Related tasks Changing time series granularity on page 60 Configuring the default time series granularity settings for the system on page 94 Manage Tioli Netcool Performance Manager user profiles by using the User Profile Management task. Related tasks Assigning a profile to a user on page 87 Assigning global threshold types to user profiles Allow users with a particular Tioli Netcool Performance Manager user profile to iew selected types of threshold iolation information. These global threshold settings apply to each GST, RTT, and time series report deployed by each user to whom this profile is assigned. Before you begin When you associate thresholds types with user profiles, a Thresholds button is aailable in the Resource View Results toolbar. You can select only the threshold types associated with the user profile currently assigned to the user. The user can use the options to toggle among RTT and Time Series reports, to display the different types of global threshold information to which they hae been granted access. If you want to exclude certain types of global threshold information from indiidual reports, you can disable the display by editing the reporter parameters. You cannot grant access to global threshold information through reporter parameters; you can only disable the display. To associate global threshold types with a user profile: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Profile Management. 2. Expand View Threshold Violations. 3. Select the appropriate check boxes. If you click Refresh while editing, you reert to the currently saed settings. 4. Click Apply. Example For example, if a user profile has access priileges to burst thresholds and baseline thresholds, those thresholds are aailable in the Resource View Results toolbar for users assigned that profile. 92 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

103 The thresholds proide a conenient method of horizontal naigation between RTTs or time series reports. If the user drills down from a GST burst iolation link to an RTT burst report, the user can then select the baseline link to render a baseline RTT. This table shows some potential options based on the role of the user. User Profile Task Threshold Type NOC SLA SLA NOC SLA As part of fault management, the user wants to see degradation tolerance in real time. The user needs notification in real time. The user wants to act immediately after the problem occurs, and eliminate the iolation because of the short duration time. As account manager, the user is tracking user perception of the network. The user needs a report such as a monthly GST to show accumulation of possible network degradation oer time. The user wants to proactiely monitor resources that are at risk of iolating a period threshold. The user wants an immediate trap notification that could indicate unusual resource behaior. For example, high olume that is the result of potential hacks, low olume because of router problems, or high latency because of network path rerouting. The user wants to detect any increase in customer use of a network where usage is increasing but is still below the threshold. The user needs an indication where use needs to be tracked, that the behaior might be abnormal. Burst Period Risk Baseline Baseline Related concepts Thresholds on page 5 Configuring the display of threshold information on page 139 Chapter 4. Administration tasks 93

104 Limiting scheduled tasks for user profiles Configure the maximum task and report limits to ensure that the system does not become oerloaded by scheduled tasks during peak usage periods. Typically, processing intensie tasks are scheduled to run during off-peak periods. Before you begin You must restart the Tioli Integrated Portal application serer for your changes to take effect. Users are not informed if they exceed the task limit. Reports up to the limit are included, the remaining reports are excluded. Configure DataView settings To configure the maximum task and report limits for user profiles: 1. Select Administration Network Performance User Profile Management. 2. Expand Scheduler Task Limits. 3. Type the maximum number of tasks for each user profile. While editing, clicking Refresh reerts to the currently saed settings. 4. Type the maximum number or reports per task for each user profile. 5. Click Apply. Configure global settings for the DataView component of TNPM. Many of these settings can be oerridden on an indiidual user or group basis. You can configure the following settings: Granularity Contact Scheduler PDF Serer In addition, the resmgr administratie tool allows you to configure additional settings. Configuring the default time series granularity settings for the system Configure the default time series granularity for each time period. This setting applies to all users unless oerridden by another setting for that user. To configure the default time series granularity: 1. Select System Configuration Network Performance Performance Management. 2. Select the Granularity tab. 3. Choose the appropriate alues for each period. 94 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

105 4. Click Sae. Example You can configure a daily period to hae a granularity of 5 minutes. What to do next When you change the default granularity, iewers currently connected need to log out and log in again (or stop the browser window) to see the new granularity in their iews. It can also be necessary to refresh the iew. Related concepts Changing granularity and granularity precedence on page 37 Related tasks Configuring time series granularity for a user on page 91 Configure a contact address Configure the default address to be used when the toolbar Contact button is clicked in the Defined Resource Groups iew. This address is typically the address of an administrator or customer support. To configure a contact address: 1. Select System Configuration Network Performance Performance Management. 2. Select the Contact tab. 3. Enter a alid address. 4. Click Sae. Example If you would like to be contacted when there is a problem, you can enter your own administrator password. What to do next Verify that the Contact button is enabled for users. Configuring the DataView Scheduler Configure the DataView Scheduler to schedule the creation of consolidated iews, that is, iews that are made up of one or more indiidual tables or charts. In addition, you can schedule these consolidated iews to be sent by , with deliery notification and error information. You can also upload consolidated reports to an FTP serer to be accessed by internal users. Before you begin Important: For security reasons, consider not using the Netcool/Proiso serer to allow FTP download to external users. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 95

106 Note: If scheduled reports are to be used where multiple DataView serers are associated with the same database, the same content must be installed on each DataView serer. To configure the Scheduler: 1. Select System Configuration Network Performance Performance Management. 2. Select the Scheduler tab. 3. Enter a alid address for the Host Address. 4. Change the default alues of the other parameters as necessary, by using the table for guidance. Option Internal Scheduler Password Description The Scheduler cannot run until you change the internal password from the one set at installation time. The Internal Scheduler Password must match the password of the Tioli Integrated Portal user tnpmscheduler. You must restart the Tioli Integrated Portal application serer for your changes to take effect. User Name Password Host Serer Administrator Account If the host serer requires SMTP authentication, you must enter a alid user name and password to log in to the serer and relay messages beyond the network domain. If the host serer requires SMTP authentication, you must enter a alid user name and password to log in to the serer and relay messages beyond the network domain. A alid host serer must be proided in order for the Scheduler to start. The Scheduler delegates all to this host serer for distribution. If configured, content can include consolidated report documents, FTP notifications, and error messages. An example of an host reference is mail4.kafka.com. address of the Scheduler system administrator. All system error and task completion notifications are sent to this system administrator account. 96 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

107 Option NFS Base Directory Description A directory where finished report files are placed for storage. Consider using a directory that is accessible to all Scheduler serers. The full directory format is base FTP directory/report owner/report name.zip. For example, gien the following parameter alues: NFS base directory: /opt/ my_sched_reports Scheduled report user: user123 Scheduled report task: thruput Type of report: Daily the name of the scheduled report is: /opt/my_sched_reports/user123/ RO_user123_thruput_DAILY.zip Note: The NFS Base Directory must exist and must be writable by puser (the UNIX user running DataView). You must ensure that the NFS mount is working properly before the Scheduler attempts to write files to the remote machine. The Scheduler does not require NFS to operate. Files can also be written to the local DataView machine. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 97

108 Option FTP Base Directory Description The directory where an FTP serer can proide access to completed report files. A directory that is accessible to all Scheduler serers is suggested. The full directory format is base FTP directory/report owner/report name.zip. For example, gien the following parameter alues: FTP base directory: /opt/ my_sched_reports Scheduled report user: user123 Scheduled report task: thruput Type of report: Daily FTP Link Information Notification File Off-Peak Start Time the name of the scheduled report is: /opt/my_sched_reports/user123/ RO_user123_thruput_DAILY.zip Note: The FTP Base Directory must exist and must be writable by puser (the UNIX user running DataView). You must ensure that the NFS mount is working properly before the Scheduler attempts to write files to the remote machine. The Scheduler does not require NFS to operate. Files can also be written to the local DataView machine. The link prefix to which a file name is appended to create a complete FTP file link specification that points to a consolidated report file in the FTP file directory structure. Example: ftp://ftp_serer_name where ftp_serer_name is the name of the FTP serer that contains the scheduled reports for the user. Enter the full path name of a file containing text to be included in the body of the message sent to the recipient of a consolidated report. This file allows you to configure custom text to be included in the notification message. If the field is not populated, a default message is sent by the scheduler. The default text includes basic information about extracting the reports from the compressed file and how to open the document containing the reports. Time at which the Scheduler starts running report tasks at a higher priority. Typically set for night when fewer portal users access the serer. Default alue at initialization is 00:00:00 GMT. 98 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

109 Option Off-Peak End Time Period Completion Time Maximum Run Once Tasks Maximum Off-Peak Processes Maximum Peak Processes Wait Late Data Days Description Time at which the Scheduler switches back to running report tasks at a lower priority to aoid competing with portal requests. Default alue at initialization is 00:00:00GMT. If both start and end off-peak times are default alues, the Scheduler threads remain as low-priority threads. Time of day until which the Scheduler waits before processing a scheduled task. Waiting until this time ensures that late data resides in the database at the time the report is run. Maximum combined number of `run once' tasks that can be started by all report owners at one time. Because run once tasks are not scheduled, they do not comply with the "off peak" policy. Keep the maximum as low as possible to preent system oerload. Maximum number of report tasks that can run concurrently in the off-peak time period. Maximum number of report tasks that can run concurrently in the peak time period. Number of days the Scheduler waits before running a report task to ensure that late data resides in the database. A task is assigned by a Scheduler when the current time is within 24 hours of its next run time. In addition, the Wait Late Data Days plus the Period Completion Time are factored in. 5. Click Sae. Related tasks Stopping and starting the application serer on page 70 Configuring the PDF serer Netcool/Proiso allows users to sae reports displayed on the portal in PDF format. You need to configure the PDF serer so users can generate PDF files. Before you begin Identify the PDF serer you want to use and decide on a name for that serer. For each serer, you need a serer name and the serer URL. A default name All Serers is proided; you cannot edit this name. Optionally, you can proide additional parameters for the URL. To configure the PDF serer: 1. Select System Configuration Network Performance Performance Management. 2. Select the PDF Serer tab. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 99

110 3. For the default All Serers entry, double-click the PDF Serer URL field and enter the URL of the primary CORDA Highwire Serer for the entire Netcool/Proiso installation. Ensure that you use the fully qualified host name (kafka.com, not kafka). 4. Optional: In the Additional URL Parameters section, enter any arguments that the serer needs. 5. Optional: If you want to use another CORDA Highwire Serer instead of the default serer, click New to create an entry in the serer list. 6. Optional: To delete a serer entry, select the entry in the list and click Delete. 7. Click Sae. What to do next After applying these settings, an Export to PDF button is displayed in the Defined Resource Views toolbar for users that hae access rights to generate PDF files. Verify that users with the appropriate permissions can create a PDF. Exporting an SSL certificate to the Corda PDF serer To communicate with a serer oer SSL, Corda requires the SSL certificate of the serer. Export the Tioli Integrated Portal SSL certificate to your PDF serer. Before you begin Obtain the Tioli Integrated Portal SSL certificate by naigating to the Tioli Integrated Portal in your Web browser and exporting the certificate. See the background information from Corda at index.php?option=com_joomlaboard&itemid= &func=iew&id=1561 &catid=507. The following instructions are for Firefox 3. If you are using another browser, follow the appropriate procedure to export the SSL certificate. To ensure that Corda has the required SSL certificate: 1. Naigate to the Tioli Integrated Portal in your Web browser. 2. To export the SSL certificate: a. Click the blue icon in the address bar. b. Click More Information. c. Click View Certificate. d. In the Certificate Viewer window, click the Details tab. e. Click Export. 3. Sae the certificate as type X 509 Certificate (DER). 4. Copy the file to the following directory on the PDF serer. Create the directory if it does not exist. $CORDA_DIR/Serer/config/ssl directory 5. Restart the PDF serer by issuing the command: $CORDA_DIR/Serer/bin/ CordaSerer.sh restart 100 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

111 Allow a user to change their address Modify the tnpmuser role to allow Tioli Netcool Performance Manager users to change their own address. Before you begin Changing the Tioli Integrated Portal address for a user also changes the address in the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager database used for sending scheduled reports. To allow a Tioli Netcool Performance Manager user to change their own address in the portal. 1. In the console, select Settings Role Management. 2. In the Role Name list, click tnpmuser. 3. To see the pages to which the users of this role hae access, expand Access to Pages. 4. Click Add. 5. Expand Settings and select the check box for the Change your option. Configuring trace and logging Set the default logging leel by using the configure command. Manage logs and trace from the Troubleshooting Logs and Trace option. Default logging leel You use the configure command to configure the Tioli Integrated Portal logging leel for Tioli Netcool Performance Manager packages or components. You must restart the application serer for your changes to take effect. When you hae restarted the serer, the logging leel you hae selected becomes the default logging leel. Trace logging for DataView Only enable Trace logging under the direction or superision of IBM support. You use the com.ibm.tioli.tnpm package for obtaining trace logs for general DataView features implemented within the Tioli Integrated Portal. You use com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dataiew.legacy packages to obtain trace logs for specific components within DataView: com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dataiew.legacy.configmanager Configuration Installer, Access to DataView Registry. com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dataiew.legacy.dispatcher DataView Dispatcher. com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dataiew.legacy.dso Query builders and helpers Chapter 4. Administration tasks 101

112 Configuring database details The configure command com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dataiew.legacy.pagecontrols Style sheet components such as tables or charts. com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dataiew.legacy.reportereditor DataView Naigator. com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dataiew.legacy.scheduler DataView Scheduler. com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dataiew.legacy.timestamp Queries timing statistics. com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dataiew.legacy.utils Utility classes and DataAccess serlet. For the legacy packages, trace leels map to the following legacy debug leels. FINE 1-2 FINER 3 FINEST 4-5 Tioli Integrated Portal Logging and Tracing You use the Logging and Tracing page to specify how the serer handles log records. You can select an application serer to enable or disable a system log for that serer, specify where log data is stored, and choose a format for log content. You can also specify a log detail leel for components and groups of components. Set the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager database details by using the configure command. Use the configure command to configure the database user name, password, and database URL. Configures the database connection information and the Tioli Integrated Portal logging leel for the Tioli Netcool Performance Manager installation. Run this command from the tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew directory. You must restart the application serer for your changes to take effect. When you hae restarted the serer, the logging leel you hae selected becomes the default logging leel. Syntax configure.[bat sh] tip_location tip_user tip_password jdcb [-jdcbuser jdbc_user] [-jdcbpassword jdbc_password] [-jdcburl jdbc_url] configure.[bat sh] tip_location tip_user tip_password logging [-package package_name] [-module module_name] [-leel leel] 102 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

113 Parameters tip_location The directory where Tioli Integrated Portal (ewas) is installed. tip_user The name of a alid Tioli Integrated Portal user. tip_password The password for that Tioli Integrated Portal user. jdbc_user The database user name. jdbc_password The database password. jdbc_url The database URL. package_name Set logging for this software package. Wildcards * and? are supported. module_name Optional: Set logging for this software component. Wildcards * and? are supported. leel Set the leel of logging detail: fatal, seere, warning, audit, info, config, detail, fine, finer, finest, or all. Samples The following command uses a wildcard to set a Tioli Integrated Portal logging leel of detail for all the packages that begin with com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dal.: bin/configure.sh /opt/ibm/tioli/tip tip_username tip_password logging -package com.ibm.tioli.tnpm.dal.* -leel detail The following command sets the JDBC URL to jdbc:oracle:thin@:host1.company.com:1521:pv: bin/configure.sh /opt/ibm/tioli/tip tip_username tip_password jdbc -jdbcurl jdbc:oracle:thin@:host1.company.com:1521:pv Related tasks Creating a Tioli Integrated Portal user on page 72 Stopping and starting the application serer on page 70 Moing DataView content between Tioli Netcool Performance Manager instances Use the import and export commands to moe DataView content between Tioli Netcool Performance Manager instances. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 103

114 The export command Exports content, such as JSP pages, CSS and images from the DataView web application. All content is exported to the content directory at tip location/products/tnpm/ dataiew/content. Run this command from the tip_location/products/tnpm/ dataiew directory. Syntax export.[bat sh] tiplocation tipuser tippassword pattern Parameters tip_location The directory where Tioli Integrated Portal is installed tip_user The name of a alid Tioli Integrated Portal user tip_password The password for that Tioli Integrated Portal user pattern Identify the files to export. Wildcards * and? are supported. Sample Assuming a default installation, this command copies all content in the /opt/ibm/tioli/tip directory to the content directory at /opt/ibm/tioli/tip/ products/tnpm/dataiew/content: bin/export.sh /opt/ibm/tioli/tip tip_username tip_password pattern_name The import command Imports content, such as JSP pages, CSS and images, to the DataView content directory in a DataView instance. All content found in the content directory tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/ content is imported. Howeer, DataView only detects content located in certain directories. Before running the import command, ensure that the following directories are present and contain the content that you want to import: tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/bin/content tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/bin/content/silerstream/pages tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/bin/content/silerstream/objectstore/ Images tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/bin/content/silerstream/objectstore/ General If these directories do not exist, create them as puser and populate them with the content you want to import. Files with the same name in the destination location are oerwritten; otherwise, a new item is created. Run this command from the tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/bin directory. 104 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

115 Syntax import.[bat sh] tip_location tip_user tip_password Parameters tip_location The directory where Tioli Integrated Portal is installed tip_user The name of a alid Tioli Integrated Portal user. tip_password The password for that Tioli Integrated Portal user. Sample Assuming a default installation, this command copies all content in the content directory /opt/ibm/tioli/tip/products/tnpm/dataiew/content to the /opt/ibm/tioli/tip directory: bin/import.sh /opt/ibm/tioli/tip tip_username tip_password Migrating SilerStream content to the Tioli Integrated Portal Use the migrate command to moe SilerStream content, users, or both to the Tioli Integrated Portal. The migrate command connects remotely to a SilerStream serer and migrates all the specified data to a Tioli Integrated Portal installation. The migrate command requires: Source access credentials SilerStream administrator user name and password Destination access credentials Tioli Integrated Portal administrator user name and password You can run the migrate command from Solaris, AIX, or Linux computers. If there are multiple SilerMasters, you can run the migrate tool and create multiple new DataView serers from a single SilerStream computer. The migrate command Migrates all DataView content, users, or both from a preious DataView installation. The migrate command connects remotely to a SilerStream serer and migrates all the specified data to a Tioli Integrated Portal installation. Run this command from the tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew directory. Ensure that both the SilerStream and Tioli Integrated Portal serers are running before running the command. Syntax migrate.[bat sh] tip_location tip_user tip_password silerstream_url silerstream_username silerstream_password type [-import ] Chapter 4. Administration tasks 105

116 Parameters tip_location The directory where Tioli Integrated Portal is installed tip_user The name of a alid Tioli Integrated Portal user. tip_password The password for that Tioli Integrated Portal user. silerstream_url The URL of the DataView SilerStream serer. silerstream_username The SilerStream administrator user name. silerstream_password The SilerStream administrator password. type content Migrates all SilerStream content. All content is copied to the content directory in the Tioli Integrated Portal installation tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/content. Depending on the type of content, it is copied to the following directories: tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/bin/content/silerstream/ Pages tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/bin/content/silerstream/ Objectstore/Images tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/bin/content/silerstream/ Objectstore/General user Migrates all SilerStream users. Each user in SilerStream is either an administrator or user. In the Tioli Integrated Portal, the administrator role is mapped to tnpmadministrator, and the user role is mapped to tnpmuser. The migration tool creates two user groups, tnpmadministrators and tnpmusers, that contain all the users with the corresponding roles. Password information is not migrated. Under Tioli Integrated Portal, the password is set to be the same as the user name. For example, the SilerStream user puser with password p becomes user puser with password puser when migrated to the Tioli Integrated Portal. all Exports all SilerStream content and users. -import Indicates to import the migrated content into the Tioli Integrated Portal. Sample Run the following command as user root. Assuming a default installation, this command copies all SilerStream content and users in the SilerStream serer silerstreamserer to the /opt/ibm/tioli/tip/products/tnpm/dataiew/content directory in a Tioli Integrated Portal installation: bin/migrate.sh /opt/ibm/tioli/tip tip_username tip_password siler 106 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

117 SilerStream page conersion The migrate command performs the following processing when conerting SilerStream pages to JaaSerer Pages (JSPs). Each SilerStream page is made up of three parts: HTML (including HTML markup, inline CSS, JaaScript, and images) Jaa code SilerStream page controls The migrate command does not modify inline CSS, JaaScript, or images. This type of page content is extracted from the SilerStream serer and imported into Tioli Integrated Portal unchanged. The HTML and Jaa code sections are read from the page, processed and combined to generate a new JSP. HTML When processing HTML sections, SilerStream page controls are replaced with custom DataView JSP tags. For example, consider the following HTML from a SilerStream page: <di> <h1><agcontrol name="stylesheetnamelabel"></h1> </di> That HTML is conerted to the following JSP. The classname attribute in the new JSP tag comes from the SilerStream page control metadata section of the SilerStream page. <<di> <h1><proiso:pagecontrol classname="com.sssw.shr.page.agplabel" name="stylesheetnamelabel"></h1> </di> Jaa code When processing Jaa code sections, the code is embedded into the JSP directly using the standard JSP statement tag. For example, consider the following Jaa code from a SilerStream page: <class SomePage extends AgpPage { priate AgpLabel label; public SomePage() { this.label.settext("foo") } } That Jaa code is conerted to the following JSP: <%! //class SomePage extends AgpPage { priate AgpLabel label; public SomePage() { this.label.settext("foo") } } %> All JSP fragments generated from the HTML and Jaa code conersion are combined into one JSP page. When executed, this JSP page generates the same HTML as the SilerStream page. Chapter 4. Administration tasks 107

118 The information command The resulting JSP can only be run by using the SilerStream emulation layer. If you are using unsupported SilerStream page controls (AgpTabPane, AgpImageHotSpot and AgpButtonRadio) then the resulting JSP will not work correctly. See ersion information for the DataView and ewas components currently installed. Run this command from the tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/bin directory. Syntax information.[bat sh] tip_location tip_user tip_password Parameters tip_location The directory where Tioli Integrated Portal is installed. tip_user The name of a alid Tioli Integrated Portal user. tip_password The password for that Tioli Integrated Portal user. Sample The patch command Assuming a default installation, this command lists ersion information for the current installation: information.sh /opt/ibm/tioli/tip tip_username tip_password Use to apply a patch to the installed ersion of DataView. Use as directed by the instructions proided with the patch. Run this command from the tip_location/products/tnpm/dataiew/bin directory. Syntax patch.[bat sh] tip_location tip_user tip_password Parameters tip_location The directory where Tioli Integrated Portal is installed tip_user The name of a alid Tioli Integrated Portal user. tip_password The password for that Tioli Integrated Portal user. 108 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

119 Chapter 5. Deploying reports Starting DataMart Deploy reports with DataMart by using the Resource Editor module and the Resource Manager command-line interface. Deploying a report means that you associate a reporter either with a rule that generates groups or with a specific group. You can choose to deploy reports against: Grouping rules when you want a report to be deployed automatically to eery group generated by the rule. Groups when you only want a report deployed against a specific group. For more information about the Resource Editor module, see Chapter 18, Editing Resources in the Netcool/Proiso DataMart User's Guide. For more information about the Resource Manager command-line interface, see Chapter 2, Using Resource Manager in the Netcool/Proiso Command Line Interface User's Guide. You can start Netcool/Proiso DataMart locally or remotely. To start Netcool/Proiso DataMart: 1. Log in as pmuser. 2. If necessary, enter your display enironment. For example, localhost:0.0 or from a remote computer: DISPLAY=<your IP address> 3. Enter the pm & command. The Netcool/Proiso DataMart toolbar opens. Deploying reports by using the Resource Editor You can deploy reports by using the Resource Editor module in DataMart. Before you begin Before you can deploy reports, you must hae completed the following tasks: Configured a report. Associated users with reports. Set up security required for users to access reports. This procedure uses example report names to illustrate the process. To deploy reports by using the Report Editor: Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

120 1. Start DataMart. The Netcool/Proiso DataMart toolbar opens. 2. In the DataMart toolbar, select the Resource tab. 3. Click Resource Editor. 4. Select the Report tab. 5. To see a list of all installed reporters, place your cursor in the name column next to the * character, and press Enter. 6. Click the Report SEGroup tab. 7. Expand a group to display all the groups and grouping rules it contains. Groups display in black. Rules display in green with an RU prefix. 8. Click a group or a grouping rule against which you want to deploy a report. Any reports currently deployed against the group or grouping rule display in the right pane. 9. Click the Report tab to display the list of reports again. 10. Click the name of the report you want to deploy. 11. Click Ctrl + Ctocopy the report. 12. Click the Report SEGroup tab to select it again. 13. Click the group name in the left pane to highlight it. 14. Click in the right pane to highlight the pane frame. 15. Click Ctrl + Vtopaste the report into the frame. A confirmation window is displayed. 16. On the confirmation window, click Yes to continue. A message window is displayed. 17. Click Close to continue. The copied report displays in the right pane. 18. Right-click in the left pane and select the AutoGrouping menu option. A confirmation window is displayed. 19. On the confirmation window, click Yes to continue. A status window shows the progress of the grouping action. Once complete, a progress complete message window is displayed. 20. Click Close to clear the message or click Details to see any errors or warnings. Users can now see the deployed report through their Web browsers. Remoing preiously deployed reports by using the Resource Editor You can remoe preiously deployed iews by using the Resource Editor module in DataMart. Before you begin This procedure uses example report names to illustrate the process. To remoe deployed reports by using the Report Editor: 1. Start DataMart. The Netcool/Proiso DataMart toolbar opens. 2. Select the Resource tab. 3. Click Resource Editor. 4. Select the Report tab. 5. To see a list of all installed reporters, place your cursor in the name column next to the * character, and press Enter. 110 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

121 6. Select the Report SEGroup tab. 7. Click the name of the report you want to delete. 8. Right-click and select Delete from the menu. A confirmation window is displayed. 9. Click Yes to delete the report. A confirmation window is displayed when the report is deleted. 10. Click Close. Accessing Resource Manager Log in to the DataMart Resource Manager command-line interface. To access Resource Manager: 1. Log in as pmuser or any user with access rights to DataMart. 2. Open a terminal window. 3. Ensure that your enironment is set by entering../datamart.en. 4. Change to the path where DataMart is installed. For example: cd /opt/pvm. Deploying reports by using Resource Manager You can deploy reports by using the Resource Manager command-line interface. Before you begin Ensure that you hae access to the serer where DataMart is installed. See the Command Line Interface Guide for more information about Resource Manager. Deploy reports against a group Deploy reports against a group when you only want a report deployed against a specific group. To deploy reports against a group, enter the resmgr command with the following syntax: resmgr -import -linkgroupse_app -colnames "npath app.name" -line "~top leel group~group to deploy report against _ report name _ " Option Top-leel group Group to deploy against Report name Description The first group in the hierarchy. The group against which you want to deploy the report. The name of the report you want to deploy. Chapter 5. Deploying reports 111

122 Example Deploy reports against grouping rules Deploy reports against grouping rules when you want a report to be deployed automatically to eery group generated by the rule. To deploy reports against grouping rules, enter the resmgr command with the following syntax: resmgr -import -linkgroupse_app -colnames "npath app.name" -line "~top leel group~group containing rule~rule name _ report name _ " Option Top-leel group Rule to deploy against Report name Description The first group in the hierarchy. The rule against which you want to deploy the report. The name of the report you want to deploy. Example 112 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

123 Deploy all reports according to grouping rules Deploy all reports against grouping rules when you want all reports to be deployed automatically to eery group generated by the rule. To deploy all reports according to rules, enter the inentory command with the following syntax: inentory -nox -reportgrouping Chapter 5. Deploying reports 113

124 114 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

125 Chapter 6. Configuring reports Content designers use DataView Naigator to create reports by configuring a report framework, known as a reporter. You create an instance of a report by setting reporter parameters. Just as each type of report has a corresponding reporter, each reporter is deried from a corresponding style sheet. In addition to specifying a framework for the HTML page layout, the style sheet associates a database with some combination of charts and tables and, if a table is being displayed, a table adaptor. The style sheet also specifies a mediator, which is an object that brokers the collection of report information with the display of that information in a report. A few basic style sheets are installed with DataView. Most style sheets, howeer, are deliered with a technology pack, which is a package designed to collect and display specific kinds of network data. For example, data supplied by a Cisco QoS MIB. You or IBM Professional Serices can also customize style sheets and reporters. The following sections explain in general terms how to configure reporters to customize a report. High-leel tasks The high-leel steps to create and iew a report are as follows: 1. A Netcool/Proiso style sheet is created and installed on the Netcool/Proiso DataView serer, typically by IBM Professional Serices or as part of a Netcool/Proiso Technology Pack. Alternatiely, an existing style sheet is modified. 2. Using DataView Naigator, a content designer does the following tasks: a. Creates a reporter and associates it with a style sheet. b. Configures a specific instance of a report, by defining the arious parameters in the reporter, and setting specific queries and filters. c. Tests the new report to see how it displays in a browser. 3. The finished report is then deployed on the portal, typically by the Netcool/Proiso administrator. 4. Users with the correct permissions access the report on the portal. The Netcool/Proiso DataView application serer reads in the reporter information, makes the necessary queries, populates the reporter framework with data, then displays the results on the portal. Related tasks Appendix A, Configuring specific reports, on page 185 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

126 Creating or modifying reporters Use DataView Naigator to create a reporter or to edit an existing reporter. Before you begin If you create a reporter, you must associate it with a style sheet. A style sheet must already be installed on your system. Ensure that you hae edit priileges for existing reporters that you want to edit. To create a new or modify an existing reporter: 1. In the portal naigation, click System Configuration Network Performance Define Resource Views 2. When prompted, enter your user name and password. The DataView Naigator window opens. 3. To create a reporter: a. From the list of installed application folders, select the folder where you want to create a reporter. b. Select File New Reporter. The Style Sheet Selection window opens. c. Optional: Clicking the Update button synchronizes the style sheets in the menu with the style sheets installed on the serer. d. From the list of style sheets in the menu, select the appropriate style sheet for your report. e. Name and sae the new reporter. 4. To edit an existing reporter: a. Ensure that you hae permission to edit the report. b. Locate the reporter by naigating through the folders. c. Expand the folder that contains the reporter. 5. Double-click the reporter name. The reporter window opens. 6. Edit the reporter parameters. 7. Sae the reporter. Related reference Basic style sheets on page 213 Working with reporter parameters A reporter parameter influences the layout of the report as well as defines to a large extent (within the boundaries of the style sheet) the type of data that the report displays. Before you begin This information does not explain eery reporter parameter in eery reporter. It explains a core set of parameters included in most of the reporters installed by Netcool/Proiso Technology Packs. Use this information as a guide for editing the parameters found in custom reporters. The following topics explain how to work with the more common reporter parameters. 116 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

127 For illustration, this figure shows an Interface Aailability GST based on a reporter installed by Netcool/Proiso Technology Packs. This figure calls out the top-leel reporter parameters for this report. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 117

128 Core reporter parameters Most parameters contain multiple options with alues you can modify, if you hae access permission. Parameter alues determine the information displayed in the generated report. These parameters sere as the foundation of the report because they define the information displayed in a report and the format in which it is displayed. A reporter contains additional parameters, not listed here, that define items such as the naigation scale of a report, how to include a title, what alternate page to use if a report is not aailable, and so on. This table contains the core set of parameters found in reporters installed by Netcool/Proiso Technology Packs. 118 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

129 Parameter Description Typical Names Mediator Links the data source and the data display components such as charts, tables, and the CSV export format. BaselineMediatorN ChartNMediator ChartNaMediator and ChartNbMediator ChartNTableMediator groupsummarytablemediator PropertyMediator RankVariationMediatorN RatioMediatorN ResDistribMediatorN resourceoerthrtablemediator resourcesummarymediator statstablemediator TopNMediatorN TableMediator Table Data is displayed in a table format defined by the parameter alues you set. ChartTable groupsummarytable resourceoerthrtable resourcesummarytable statstable Table TopNTableN Chart Data is displayed in a chart format defined by the parameter alues you set. BaselineChartN ChartN ResDistribChartN TopNChartN CSV Format Data is displayed in the comma-separated alues (CSV) Export format. CSVExport CSVExportN RatioCSVExport GSTCSVExport ResDistribCSVExport RSTCSVExport Parameters specific to Diagnostic reports This table contains the parameters necessary to create Diagnostic reports. Parameter Sub-Params Description Default Values MetricCounts N/A Allows you to None N/A add attributes associated with each metric, which you configure using the DataView Visual Table Design. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 119

130 Parameter Sub-Params Description Default Values MetricCountsLabel link Allows you to None add a label for text the Metric Counts in the report. reportsummary link text reporttitle link text Allows you to add summary of the report, which explains what the report is intended to do. Specifies a title for the report. None None link: alid URL to a report summary. text: iflink is specified, the string associated with the URL; otherwise the Metric Counts text. link: alid URL to a report summary. text: iflink is specified, the string associated with the URL; otherwise the report summary text. link: alid URL to a report title. text: iflink is specified, the string associated with the URL; otherwise the report title itself. Parameters specific to Search reports This table contains the parameters necessary to create Search reports. Parameter Sub-Params Description Default Values starttime link Specifies a start None time for the link: alid URL text report. to a start time page. text: iflink is specified, the string associated with the URL; otherwise the start time itself. 120 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

131 Editing mediator parameters in a reporter The mediator links together the data source and the data display components (charts, tables, and the CSV export format.) The parameters control the behaior of each mediator in a report. Before you begin Mediator names and parameters differ from reporter to reporter. Technology packs use a core set of the most common mediator parameter names. To edit mediator parameters: 1. Expand <prefix>mediator. For example, if editing a GST reporter, expand groupsummarytablemediator. A list of parameters displays. Some reporter parameters (for example, GSTs) include a list of formulas numbered formula1 through formula6. The number in the formula title indicates its position in the report. 2. Access the mediator parameters. For example, if editing a GST reporter (or a Trouble Ticket reporter), expand formula1. 3. Edit the mediator parameters. Common mediator parameters This table contains the most common mediator parameters in alphabetic order. The table includes a brief description and information about how to edit each parameter. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 121

132 Parameter Description How to Edit AdGrpTimeSeries Enable and configure an Adanced Group Time Series (AGTS). If you do not enable an AGTS, a standard GTS is generated by using the statistics specified for the mediator. Consider using the AGTS with the following: Daily, weekly, monthly Quarterly, yearly, 14 monthly, use it during off-peak hours or for scheduled reports When you configure an AGTS, the statistics alue for the mediator parameter of the reporter is ignored. AGTS statistics are defined through the AGTS window. AGTS reports use raw data rather than preiously aggregated data from the database. As a result, the amount of data that is queried and aggregated each time an AGTS report is run is proportional to the length of the report period. Double-click AdGrpTimeSeries to access the AGTS window. Select the Enable Adanced Group Time Series check box to enable the adanced time series behaior and to actiate the configuration options. For Spatial Aggregation statistics, retain the default alue of sum or choose one of the following alid options: ag, count, min, or max. Click Select to access the Select Stats window. For Time Aggregation statistics, retain the default alue of ag or choose one (or more) of the following alid options: count, min, max, or sum. The statistics you choose for time aggregation are applied to the results of the spatial aggregation. For example, if you choose ag as the time aggregation after retaining the default alue of sum for the spatial aggregation, the chart displays the aerage of the sum of the data for the specified granularity period. Optional: If you check Temporal Aggregation First, the primary aggregation is temporal, and the secondary aggregation is spatial. The default is the reerse. Click the box next to Enable Data Filtering to enable data filtering on the resource count. If enabled, one data point is receied per resource. The number of data points in the sampling period must equal the number of resources in the group. If not enabled, all data points in the sampling period are aggregated regardless of the resource count. You can set the Tolerance to any alue between 1.00 and The default is Tolerance accommodates time-stamp shifting among the polled resources. When time stamps differ, samples can be shifted enough in time to cross the boundary from one polling interal to another. The system calculates the time difference between neighboring data points. If the difference is greater than the polling period but less than the polling period multiplied by the tolerance, a time-stamp correction is made, based on the preious time stamp plus the polling period. 122 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

133 Parameter Description How to Edit baseline Set the baseline and choose the Expand baseline. statistic to be displayed. Double-click periods to access the text box. Enter the number of periods you want included in the report, from 1 to 5. Double-click stats to access the Select Stats window. The statistics currently used in the report are listed in the right pane. Additional statistics that can be used are listed in the left pane. Edit the statistic for this baseline. busyhours Display the busy hour of the reporting Double-click busyhours to access the period in the table report. drop-down list of alues. filter String used to filter the results displayed in the generated report (GST or RST) when first accessed on the portal. Note for RST: Remoe the paging (filtering) page control from the style sheet upon which the RST is based if you want to preent the user from oerriding the filtering criteria you enter here. Filtering information entered on the portal oerwrites the criteria set in the reporter. Choose true if you want the busiest time of the reporting period to display in the table. Choose false if you do not want the busiest time of the reporting period to display in the table. For GST only, Expand group. Double-click filter to access the text box. Enter the string you want to use to filter results. Note for Multi-Resource: When configuring line chart filters, the family criteria can be left empty, which allows any ubelement of the group - whateer its family - to match the filter. formulan A list of formulas displays, numbered formula1 through formula6. The formula titles include a number, which indicates the position of the formula in the report. You can report on up to six metrics per report. Expand formula1. Double-click metrics to access the Metrics selection dialog box. Double-click stats. The Select Stats dialog box opens. Note: Resource Summary Tables can be configured to support up to 20 metrics. groupratio Setting the group ratio to true applies the distribution report to a group. Double-click groupratio to access the alue list. Click the down arrow to display the alue true. Click true to select it. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 123

134 Parameter Description How to Edit grouptopn Choose whether to report on resources Double-click grouptopn to access the alue or groups. list. Click the down arrow to display both alues. Click true to select it. metricfromurl metrics numberofresults pagesize propertyn If the report you are drilling down from can pass metrics to the URL, that metric is used. Otherwise the metric name you enter in the metrics field is used. Result of a formula applied to resources. You can select the metric information you want to display in the report. Set the number of results displayed on a report page. Set the number of resources displayed on a report page. Enter up to three properties (property1, property2, and property3) for a Trouble Ticket reporter. Although you can include all three properties in the reporter, you can apply a filter to only one of them. (If you include more than one, the filter for the property with the lower number is used.) Filter string alues include the trouble ticket status codes P: and T:. You can enter one or both alues to indicate that you want either one or the other alue returned. Separate the alues by using a semicolon. For example, to return the rows that contain only a P: or only a T:, enter: P:;T: You can then decide whether the filter string is inclusie or exclusie. Inclusie means to filter based on the alues entered; exclusie means do not return the results for the alues entered. Enter $URL:METRIC in the metricfromurl field: If the report you are drilling down from can pass metrics to the URL, that metric is used. Otherwise the metric name you enter in the metrics field is used. Double-click metrics to access the Metric selection window. If you are editing a reporter that includes the metricfromurl parameter, but the report you are drilling down from cannot pass metrics to the URL, the metric name you enter here is used. Double-click numberofresults to access the text box. Edit the default alue of 10 to the number you want. Press Enter. Double-click pagesize:50 to access the text box. Edit the default alue of 50 to the number you want. Expand propertyn (1, 2, or 3). Double-click properties to access the Property Selection window. Expand filter. Double-click string to access the text box. Enter the string on which to filter. 124 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

135 Parameter Description How to Edit properties Display resource properties in the Double-click properties to access the Property report. A property is any attribute or Selection window. characteristic that defines a resource more precisely and proides additional resource information. Properties can be customer attributes and technical attributes. The properties option does not apply to group reports because groups do not hae properties. proideallranges Set the proideallranges parameter to true if you want the maximum 10 ranges to display, een if you only set some of them. Double-click proideallranges to access the list of alues. Click the down arrow to display the alue true. If you retain the default alue of false, only the ranges you hae set display. Click true to select it. All ranges display (including those ranges you set.) rangen Distribute resources or groups across specific ranges. Expand range0. Double-click alueoer to access the text box. Enter a number to set the lowest alue of the range. For example, enter 5. Double-click alueunder to set the highest alue of the range. For example, enter 30. The first range you set is from 5 to 30 inclusie. If only one parameter is defined, a range is created based on that one definition. For example, if you set alueoer at 50 and leae alueunder blank, the range includes only alues oer 50. If you enter 50 for alueunder and leae alueoer blank, the range includes only alues less than 50. Repeat steps for each range you want to set. You can set a maximum of 10. sort Indicate the order by which you want to sort information in Trouble Ticket reports. Sort options include: Name Metric1 Metric2 Metric3 Metric4 Metric5 Metric6 Property1 Property2 Property3 Expand sort. Double-click ascending to display both alues, true and false. Highlight the alue false and left-click if you want the sort results to display in descending order rather than ascending. Double-click orderby to display the list of alues. Highlight the alue you want to use as the sort criterion and left-click. Also indicate whether to list the results in ascending or descending order. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 125

136 Parameter Description How to Edit stats Values of the formula for the gien Double-click stats to access the Select Stats time period window. Edit the statistics for this metric. toprank Enable or disable the top rank Double-click toprank enable field to access the drop-down list. UseLookup Indicate whether to use a lookup table to retriee the string representation of a Problem Type metric for display in a Trouble Ticket report. Because the database cannot store the string representation of metric alues, a lookup table in the DataView registry stores the map of the metric to the associated string representation. Click the down arrow to display both alues, true and false. Highlight the alue you want and left-click. Double-click the UseLookup field to access the drop down list. Click the down arrow to display both alues, true and false. Highlight the alue you want and left-click to select it. alueoer During Trouble Ticket report generation, the lookup table is used to map the numeric alue with the string alue for display in the report. Display all resources (or groups if a group TopN reporter) oer or equal to the alue you enter here. Value oer entries are applied to the statistic's alues from the preious and the current period. If those alues exceed the alue you set here, they display on the report. Expand alueoer. Enter $URL:VO in the default field. Enter a number you want to use as the filtering criteria in the alue field. This number is used if the report you are drilling down to does not pass metrics to the URL. The alueoer parameters apply to the first statistic entered in the stats parameter. If the report you are drilling down to can pass metrics to the URL, these parameter alues are used to filter the results. Otherwise the number entered in the alue field is used. Note: If editing parameters for resource distribution report (ResDistribMediator1 range 0-9,) you enter a number into the alueoer fields for each range. 126 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

137 Parameter Description How to Edit alueunder Display all resources (or groups if a group TopN) under or equal to the alue you enter here. Value under entries you make here are applied to the statistic's alues from the preious and the current period. If those alues fall short of the alue you set here, they display on the report. The alueunder parameters apply to the first statistic entered in the stats parameter. Expand alueunder. Enter $URL:VU in the default field. Enter a number you want to use as the filtering criteria in the alue field. This number is used if the report you are drilling down to does not pass metrics to the URL. Note: If editing parameters for resource distribution report (ResDistribMediator1 range 0-9,) you enter a number into the alueoer fields for each range. If the report you are drilling down to can pass metrics to the URL, these parameter alues are used to filter the results. Otherwise the number entered in the alue field is used. Selecting or remoing metrics Select and remoe metrics by using the Metrics window. Before you begin In the Metrics window, the left pane contains aailable metrics and the right pane contains selected metrics. To select metrics for a mediator: 1. Double-click the metrics mediator parameter. The Metrics window opens. 2. In the left pane, expand the directories to find the metrics you want to report on. 3. To add metrics, select them in the left pane and click the right arrow button to moe them to the right pane. 4. To remoe metrics, select them in the right pane and click the left-arrow button to moe them to the left pane. 5. Click OK to exit the Metrics window. Your selected metrics display in the metrics field. Selecting a suppression metric You can choose an alternatie metric to display in the browser if the metric you are reporting on contains a non-null alue. Before you begin If the suppressionmetric parameter is defined, the metric is read before generating the report. If the alue of the metric is anything other than 0.0, the report is suppressed. When a report is suppressed, the page defined by the alternatepage reporter parameter displays instead. The default page is PVRpSuppressed.html. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 127

138 To select the suppressionmetric: 1. Double-click suppressionmetric. The Metrics window opens. 2. Choose the alternatie metric. Metric data format Formatting the metric alues that display in reports proides consistent management of the numeric information seen by the report iewer. You can format the metric data displayed in a report, if the option is included in the reporter parameters. You can determine how the report table formats the data it displays. Scaling lets you indicate which unit to display per metric. If no data is aailable for a metric or statistic and a particular group or resource, the report displays a string that indicates there is no data. The string depends on the data type and can either be "--" or "0." The use of the two different indicators distinguishes between a Trouble Ticket counter (monitors user actiity) and an SNMP counter (monitors deice behaior.) When a counter represents user actiity, the counter is 0 if there is no user actiity; which means no data has been stored. The absence of an explicit alue 0 is best displayed as "0" in the report. When the counter represents deice behaior, the SNMP formula queries a counter that can explicitly return the alue 0; which is stored in the database. If the deice does not respond, no data from which a alue can be stored (then displayed) exists. The lack of a alue is best displayed as "--" in the report because the lack of a alue does not mean that the alue is 0. Formatting metric data You can format the metric data displayed in a report if the option is included in the reporter parameters. Before you begin The following instructions include the parameter names for the GST report. These parameters are also aailable in other reports, including the following: RST RTT RPT TopN Matrix Table To format metric data: 1. Expand formulan. For example, formula1. 2. Expand metrics. 128 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

139 3. Expand format. 4. Double-click FormatA and select an option from the list. Option None Double Description Display the alue as it comes from the result set and is considered a string. Standard DataView presentation. Value is formatted to limit the number of digits and if set by content designer or if necessary, use a unit (/1000 and add the symbol M and K, T, or G). Scientific notation is used if the alue is aboe 1000 Terra. If no alue is returned, the string used is "--." Date Duration Conerts a metric alue to its date/time equialent and assumes that the alue is the number of seconds since the epoch (January 1, 1970.) If no alue is returned, the following string is returned: "--" Two options: Duration(HH:MM) Duration(HH:MM:SS) If no alue is returned, a zero "0" is returned. Integer Percent TTCounter Display the alue as an integer, which means the decimal part of the number is dropped. For example, is displayed as Integers are typically used to display counter alues. Value displayed as a percent. The alue is multiplied by 100 and the percent symbol (%) is added. If no alue is returned, the following string is returned: "--" Display the alue as an integer. If no alue is returned, a zero "0" is returned. Selecting statistics You can add and remoe statistics for a mediator by using the Statistics Selection window. Before you begin In the Statistics Selection window, the left pane contains aailable statistics and the right pane contains selected metrics. If the stats parameter contains default statistics, they are aailable in the right pane. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 129

140 To select or remoe statistics: 1. Double-click the stats parameter. The Statistics Selection window opens. 2. To remoe statistics, select them in the right pane and click the left-arrow button to moe them to the left pane. 3. In the left pane, select the statistics in the same order you want them displayed in the report and click the right arrow button to moe them to the right pane. The following statistics are aailable. Option Description AutoThrCnt Used only to display threshold iolation information in an RST. Integer that represents the number of times the autothreshold (baseline) threshold limit was iolated. ag Aerage alue of the metric for the reporting period. agratio Ratio of the current aerage alue compared to the aerage of alues for all the resources. Not used with: Baseline reports Distribution charts Rank Variation reports All time series reports BurstCritCnt Used only to display threshold iolation information in an RST. Integer that represents the number of times the burst threshold Critical limit was iolated. BurstViolation Displays whether the most recent alue caused (or fixed) a burst threshold iolation in an RST that supports "Most Recent Values." Based on where the most recent alue falls when tested against the configured threshold, the RST can report warning, critical, or no iolation. BurstWarnCnt Used only to display threshold iolation information in an RST. Integer that represents the number of times the burst threshold Warning limit was iolated. count Number of alues for the metric for the reporting period. 130 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

141 Option lastvalue lasttime max maxtime min mintime percentile Description The most recent metric alue, for the reporting period, corresponding to a specific resource/formula combination in an RST that supports "Most Recent Values." The date/time associated with the lastvalue in an RST that supports "Most Recent Values." Maximum alue of the metric for the reporting period. Time when maximum alue of the metric occurred. Minimum alue of the metric for the reporting period. Time when minimum alue of the metric occurred. Percentile leel alue defined when a request for data collection is created in the Request Editor. Not used with Adanced Group Time Series reports. percentilell Number used so that a certain percentile of data set obserations fall below the leel and a certain percentile fall aboe it. Not used with Adanced Group Time Series reports. PeriodCritDur PeriodWarnDur squality Used only to display threshold iolation information in an RST. Duration of time (DD:HH:MM) spent aboe the period threshold Critical limit. Used only to display threshold iolation information in an RST. Duration of time (DD:HH:MM) spent aboe the period threshold Warning limit. Ratio of the number of actual measurements receied in a reporting period compared to the expected number of measurements. Not used with Adanced Group Time Series reports sum Sum of all the alues for a metric for the reporting period. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 131

142 Option sumratio Description Ratio of the current sum alue compared to the sum of alues for all the resources. Not used with: Baseline reports Distribution charts Rank Variation reports All time series reports 4. Click OK. Adding Most Recent Value support to an RST You can add Most Recent Value Support to an RST. Before you begin If the report period does not include the current day, then the most recent alue/time and iolation columns are not displayed. Important: An RST containing most recent alues can display more slowly than other RSTs. The display time increases as the number of lines in the chart that contain most recent alues increases. Important: Bulk Collector Only: Netcool/Proiso typically waits 15 minutes after the beginning of a new hour to refresh data. To reduce this time period for "Most Recent Values" support, open the Topology Editor and naigate to the property NEXT_HOUR_TIMEOUT for the CME component of the DataChannel collector. Change the alue from the default 900 seconds to 300 seconds. For information on using the Topology Editor, see the IBM Netcool/Proiso Installation Guide. To add Most Recent Value Support to an RST: 1. From an RST reporter, click statstablemediator formulan stats. The Statistics Selection window opens. 2. In the left pane, select any of the following statistics that support "Most Recent Values" and moe them to the right pane by clicking the right-arrow button. Option lastvalue lasttime Description The most recent metric alue, for the reporting period, corresponding to a specific resource/formula combination in an RST that supports Most Recent Values. The date/time associated with the lastvalue in an RST that supports Most Recent Values. 132 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

143 Option BurstViolation Description Displays whether the most recent alue caused (or fixed) a burst threshold iolation in an RST that supports Most Recent Values. Based on where the most recent alue falls when tested against the configured threshold, the RST can report warning, critical, or no iolation. Related concepts Support for Most Recent Values on page 14 Aggregation statistics for Adanced Group Time Series You use two aggregation statistics with the adanced group time series, spatial and time. The statistic you choose for time aggregation is performed by using the results of the spatial aggregation. You can choose multiple time aggregation statistics to display the results of each as a separate time series in the chart. (You can only choose one statistic for spatial aggregation.) This table contains examples of the results for each time aggregation when a spatial aggregation of sum is used. Spatial Aggregation Statistics Time Aggregation Statistics Result sum ag Aerage of the spatial aggregations for each granularity period. sum count Number of spatial aggregation points calculated for each granularity period. sum max Maximum aggregation calculation of the spatial aggregations for each granularity period. sum min Minimum aggregation calculation of the spatial aggregations for each granularity period. sum sum Total of the spatial aggregations for each granularity period. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 133

144 Displaying statistics in a table heading You can display the name of a statistic in a table heading. To display a statistic as a table heading: 1. Expand the table mediator. 2. Expand headings. 3. Expand stats. 4. Double-click display. 5. Choose true. The statistic name is displayed in the table heading. Editing metric and statistic labels You can choose to label metrics and statistics with more meaningful names. To edit metric or statistics labels: 1. Expand metrics or stats. 2. Double-click labels. 3. Enter text for a label or use one or more ariables. If combining ariables, include spaces between ariable names. The text or ariables you entered display in the text field. Properties Selection Use the Property Selection window or the DataView Property Selector window to select parameter properties. You can select multiple properties from the Property Selection window by using the Ctrl and Shift keys. The selected properties are displayed in the properties field. Multiple properties are separated by a semicolon (;) and a space. Selecting properties for RST reports In the table mediator parameters for RST reports, you select properties by using the DataView Property Selector window instead of the Property Selection window. The DataView Property Selector window allows you to specify one or more properties that are displayed in an RST report, and to specify the order and column label for each property. When you click the Add Properties button, the standard Property Selector window opens. Select one or more properties to add to the Selected Properties pane. You can then specify a column label indiidually for each property. The other features of this window support future functionality and are unaailable. 134 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

145 Supported ariables This table lists the ariables supported for use in building your reports. Variable $END_TIME Description Last day, week, month of the report period. Note: There are also two related ariables, $ST and $ET, used only in chart titles. $GROUP_HIERARCHY $GROUP_NAME $PROPERTY:<property name> $REPORT_PERIOD $RESOURCE_NAME $START_TIME a $TOTAL_ROWS Group path where the report is deployed. Name of the group under which the report is deployed. The alue of the resource property defined by <property name>. You can only use this alue in reports on single resources. Reporting period of daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, yearly, or 14 monthly Name of the resource First day, week, or month of the report period. Used in RST reports in the Table.resource.label parameter, as follows: Resources($TOTAL_ROWS) Allows the RST to display the total number of rows if filtering and paging are not enabled. You can then determine how many sites are missing from a report. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 135

146 Variable $URL:<url param> Description Specifies a URL parameter that is used when a reporter needs a alue from the URL. Used most often when passing metric parameters from a reporter to its drill down. In the drill down, you see $URL:METRIC. The alid parameters that are typically specified are $URL:METRIC, $URL:STAT, $URL:UC, and $URL:TRENDPERIOD. These parameters only work in the following cases: A report containing $URL:<url param> in its reporter has to use passed alues. A report containing $URL:<url param> has to be a drill down from another report that passes alues. A report containing $URL:<url param> must be specified as a drill down from the report that passes its alues to it. The user has to access the report containing $URL:<url param> ariables through the portal by drilling down to it from the report that passes its alues to it. The $URL:<url param> is only used as the METRIC, STAT, UC (Upgrade Condition) or TRENDPERIOD if it is specified in the correct field of the reporter (metricfromurl, statfromurl, ucfromurl, TrendingPeriodFromURL). $USERNAME $USERPROPERTY:<property name> Login name of the user. The alue of the user property defined by <property name>. Busy hour units See this table for busy hour units. Reporting Period Unit Displayed Description Day Hour A sliding busy hour displays in the chart. Week Hour A sliding busy hour displays in the chart. Month Day (sum) A busy day displays in the chart. Quarterly Day (sum) A busy day displays in the chart. 136 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

147 Reporting Period Unit Displayed Description Yearly Week (sum) A busy week displays in the chart. 14 Monthly Week or Month (sum) A busy week or month displays in the chart. Drill down options You can choose the reports that are aailable to drill down to from a particular report. Types of drill down reports can include: Chart drill down Table drill down Leaf reporter option Some reporters include a leaf reporter option with the drill-down chart parameter. A leaf reporter contains resources; the non-leaf reporter is included for compatibility with earlier releases. This table shows some basic reporters and indicates whether they contain the leaf option. Reporter Baseline GST Rank Variation Ratio GST Ratio RST Resource Distribution GST Resource Distribution RST RST RTT Time Series TopN/BottomN Leaf Option Leaf option displays under the BaselineChart1 parameter but does not apply to baseline reports. Do not enter information for these parameters. Yes. Yes for chart, no for table. Yes for group table and chart, no for resource table. Yes for chart, no for table. Yes for group table and chart, no for table. Yes for chart, no for table. No. No. No Yes for both chart and table Chapter 6. Configuring reports 137

148 Choosing drill-down reporters with the leaf reporter option Some reporters include a leaf reporter option with the drill-down chart parameter. A leaf reporter contains resources. Before you begin If editing a reporter that includes multiple formulas, repeat the instructions for each formula for which you want to associate a drill down report. To choose the drill-down reporter: 1. Expand drilldown. 2. Expand leaf. 3. Double-click reporter to access the Select Reporter window. If the leaf reporter is defined, the Leaf group uses the leaf reporter alue, while the non-leaf group uses the current reporter again. If reporter is defined, but not leaf reporter, drill down to reporter regardless of group status. 4. Expand the folders until you reach the drill down reporter you want. 5. Click the reporter to select it. 6. Click Sae. The name of the drill-down reporter displays in the reporter field. 7. Optional: To remoe a drill-down reporter, select the reporter in the Select Reporter window and click Clear. Choosing a drill-down report with the non-leaf reporter option The non-leaf reporter is included for compatibility with earlier releases. Before you begin If editing a reporter that includes multiple formulas, repeat the instructions for each formula for which you want to associate a drill-down report. To choose a drill-down reporter: 1. Expand drilldown. 2. Double-click reporter:none. The Select Reporter window opens. 3. Expand the folders until you reach the drill-down reporter you want. 4. Click the reporter to select it. 5. Click Sae. 6. Optional: To remoe a drill-down reporter, select the reporter in the Select Reporter window and click Clear. 138 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

149 Configuring drill downs from an RST to a composite subelement A composite subelement (CSE) is identical to a basic subelement (SE), with one exception: the CSE has additional fields called Relations, which are links to other subelements. CSEs enable a more powerful representation capability for network objects. To configure drill-downs from a Resource Summary Table (RST) to a CSE: 1. Create an RST reporter using the PVLsResourceSummaryTable style sheet. 2. Open the RST reporter. 3. Select a drill-down reporter. 4. Click the statstablemediator and reeal the resourcedepth parameter. 5. From the menu, select one of the following options: Option Group SubElement SubElementChildren - All SubElementChildren - Immediate Description Displays all the resources in the group the report is run against. Displays the resources associated with the subelement the report is run against. Displays the related subelements (RSEs) at all leels of the CSE structure below the resource against which the report is run. Displays the related subelements (RSEs) at the next immediate leel of the CSE structure below the resource against which the report is run. Configuring the display of threshold information You can configure the display of threshold information in indiidual GST, RTT, and Time Series reports. You can configure the display after you hae granted access priileges to the different types of thresholds to the different user profiles. The following algorithm is used to determine threshold iolations: If ((thresholdcount/groupsize)*100) > chartwarnthresholdpercentage Set warning color If ((thresholdcount/groupsize)*100) > charterrorthresholdpercentage Set error color thresholdcount The number of resources iolating the threshold. groupsize The number of resources in the group chart. WarnThresholdPercentage The alue from the reporter parameter of the same name chart Chapter 6. Configuring reports 139

150 ErrorThresholdPercentage The alue from the reporter parameter of the same name Note: The error color takes precedence oer the warning color. The association of threshold types with user profiles also initiates the display of threshold types on the portal. Only the threshold types that are associated with a user profile display. You can make the following edits through the reporter parameters: GST global threshold Enable or disable the display of one or more global threshold columns, select the drill-down report, and set critical and warning percentages. GST group-based threshold Enable or disable group-based threshold, set the statistic to apply, select drill-down report, and set critical and warning leels. RTT Enable or disable the display of a global threshold, indicate default threshold type for a standalone RTT, select drill-down report. An RTT only renders alues if resources hae iolated the specific threshold type requested. When rendered as a result of a drill down from a GST report, the RTT displays information releant to the threshold type in the GST threshold column of origin. (RTT displays information for one type of threshold; four different RTTs exist, one for each type of threshold.) When rendered, the user can change the type of threshold information in the report by clicking another allowed threshold type displayed on the portal. Only those threshold types to which their user profile has been granted access priileges display in the portal. Time Series Disable the display of global threshold information, indicate default threshold type for standalone time series. When rendered as a result of a drill down from an RTT, the time series displays information releant to the threshold type in the RTT threshold type of origin. When rendered, the user can change the type of threshold information in the report by clicking another allowed threshold type displayed on the portal. Related tasks Assigning global threshold types to user profiles on page 92 Configuring a GST group-based threshold You can configure the group-based threshold for Group Summary Tables (GSTs). To configure the group-based threshold: 1. Expand formulan. For example, formula1. 2. Expand thresholds. 3. Double-click GroupBased to access the list of alues. 4. Choose true if you want group-based threshold iolations to display in the report. The critical and warning alues are displayed. Choose false if you want resource-based threshold alues to display in the report. 140 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

151 5. Double-click oer to access the list of alues. 6. Choose true if you want to test whether a alue is oer the specified threshold. Choose false if you want to test whether a alue is under the specified threshold. 7. Double-click stats to access the Statistics Selection window. 8. Choose the statistic you want used for the threshold comparison. Only one statistic is used for the comparison. If you choose multiple statistics, the others are ignored. 9. Double-click timespan to access the list of alues. 10. Select the single time span you want or select all to indicate that the threshold is for all the time spans within DataView. A single time span is most often used for the counting statistics and metrics. For example, the sum and count statistics. Choose the statistic you want used for the threshold comparison. Setting critical and warning alues for thresholds You can set the threshold alues so that the user can see both a warning and critical warning when threshold iolations exceed a specified amount. To set the threshold alues: 1. Expand alues. 2. Double-click critical to access the text box. 3. Enter the numeric alue for the critical threshold. When oer=true, enter a alue higher than the alue for the warning threshold. When oer=false, enter a alue lower than the warning threshold alue. 4. Double-click warning to access the text box. 5. Enter the numeric alue for the warning threshold. When oer=true, enter a alue lower than the alue for the warning threshold. When oer=false, enter a alue higher than the warning threshold alue. Choosing a threshold drill-down for GST and RTT reports You can choose a report to which the user can drill down if a threshold alue is exceeded. To choose a drill-down report: 1. Expand thresholds. 2. Expand drilldown. For a resource-based threshold, click the drilldown option under the formulan parameter. For a group-based threshold, click the drilldown option under the thresholds parameter of the formulan parameter. 3. Double-click reporter to access the Select Reporter window. 4. Naigate to the drill down reporter you want by expanding folders. 5. Click the reporter to select it. 6. Click Sae. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 141

152 Linking GST reports at the same leel You can link a GST report to another GST report at the same leel. To link a GST report to another GST report at the same leel: 1. Open the style sheet that underlies the report, and insert a DVDrilldown object. 2. Gie the DVDrilldown object a name in the Properties window. 3. Open DataView Naigator and synchronize the style sheet with the reporter that is the basis of your report. 4. Open the reporter properties for drill-down control. 5. Set the reporter parameter to the GST you want to link to. 6. Set the text parameter to the text you want to see in the link. Use %<name> if you want the link to be localized. Disabling the display of threshold information in GST, RTT, and Time Series reports If you hae granted access priileges to a threshold type, you can disable the display of threshold information in indiidual reports. You can choose to show no threshold information or limit the display to specific threshold types. Before you begin If you hae not granted access priileges to a threshold type, enabling it in the reporter parameters has no effect. Een though you can select the threshold type from the list, it does not display in the report if the profile of the user has not been granted access priileges to it. To edit the display of threshold information: 1. Expand iolationtype to display the list of alues. 2. Highlight the alue you want to select. For example, highlight None if you want to disable the display of threshold information in this report. 3. Press Enter. Set chart error threshold percentage You set the Chart Error Threshold Percentage alue for a GST report to indicate the percentage of resources iolating the set threshold and to generate a warning. Before you begin A Netcool/Proiso DataView report query returns the number of resources in a group and the number of resources that iolated the threshold for each metric. These alues are used to determine the percentage of resources in a group that hae iolated the threshold for each metric. If this percentage exceeds the Chart Error Threshold Percentage, the cell background on the report displays a different color. 142 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

153 To set the chart error threshold percentage: 1. Double-click charterrorthresholdpercentage to access the text box. 2. Enter a alue for the error threshold percentage. For example, enter 70 for an error threshold of 70%. 3. Press Enter. Set chart warning threshold percentage You set the Chart Warning Threshold Percentage alue for a GST report to indicate the percentage of resources iolating the set threshold and generating a warning. Before you begin A Netcool/Proiso DataView report query returns the number of resources in a group and the number of resources that iolated the threshold for each metric. These alues are used to determine the percentage of resources in a group that hae iolated the threshold for each metric. If this percentage exceeds the Chart Warning Threshold Percentage, the cell background on the report displays a different color. To set the chart warning threshold percentage: 1. Double-click chartwarningthresholdpercentage to access the text box. 2. Enter a alue for the error threshold percentage. For example, enter 70 for an error threshold of 70%. 3. Press Enter. Including CSV export format This section explains how to include a link to the comma-separated alues (CSV) Export format on the report page. Before you begin The parameters you edit for CSV export format include the following names: CSVExport(N) GSTCSVExport(N) ResDistribCSVExport(N) RatioCSVExport(N) The following instructions use the parameter name CSVExport. Substitute any of the aboe names if applicable. To add a link plus text or just text: Chapter 6. Configuring reports 143

154 1. To add a link: a. Expand CSVExport. b. Double-click link to access the text edit box. c. Enter the address of the site or page to which you want to link. For example: d. Press Enter. The address displays in the link text box. If a label is a CSV link, the alue of link is ignored. e. Double-click text to access the text edit box. f. Enter the text you want associated with the link. g. Press Enter. The text displays in the text box. 2. To add text only: a. Expand CSVExport. b. Double-click text to access the text edit box. c. Enter either the text you want for a summary or enter one or more ariables. If combining ariables, include spaces between ariable names. d. Press Enter. Setting report column order in Trouble Ticket reports You can specify the order in which you want the metric data, property, and resource columns to display in the Trouble Ticket report. Before you begin By default, the columns display in the order listed in the reporter. If you do not set column order, the order used in the reporter is applied: resource names first, metrics 1 through 6 next, and finally properties 1 through 3. To set column order: 1. Expand Table. 2. Expand metricn. For example, metric6. 3. Double-click column to access the text box. 4. Enter the number that indicates where the column belongs in the report display. For example, if the report contains a total of fie columns (two metrics, two properties, and a resource), and you want this column second in the order, enter Repeat steps to order each metric, property, and resource column you plan to display in the report. (You do not hae to number the columns sequentially.) The column with the lowest alue is to the left and the column with th highest alue to the right. 144 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

155 Table sorting You can select limited default sort criteria for a table, which is used when a report is first generated, before the report iewer can select sort criteria. The user can select other columns as sort criteria while on the portal. You can enable column sorting and set sorting defaults for the following types of table reports. GST RST RTT Trouble Ticket You can enable and disable sorting on a per table basis. If sorting is enabled, all columns of the table can be selected as the sort criteria with some exceptions. If sorting is not enabled, the table is sorted based on the default sort criteria defined either in the query or by the reporter parameters. The user cannot select sorting criteria. GST Sorting The GST has an option to not display the statistic label header row. If this row is not displayed, the sorting mechanism moes to the metric heading row. If a metric is selected for sorting, the first statistic listed for the metric in the reporter is used as the other sort criterion. If the reporter defines the sort criterion as a metric, the first column displayed for the selected metric is sorted. For the GST, the first column is the default sort criterion specified by the reporter. For NOC GST, the Burst column is sorted. For SLA and PSLA users, the Period column is sorted. If reporter parameters define a metric for the sort criterion but disable the resource threshold display, the first statistic defined for the metric is used as the default sort criterion. Special Considerations If the sorting option applies to reports that include more than one page, the sorting is performed on the entire group of resources or groups, except for the RTT. Sorting only affects filtered results, it does not negate the filtering operation. If you specify a metric that has multiple statistics defined as the default sort criterion, the first column of data for the metric in the report is used as the default sort criterion. For example, if you select a metric for the sort criterion in a NOC GST the table is sorted by the Burst threshold column as it is the first column displayed for the metric. If the threshold columns are not displayed, the first statistic listed is the sort criterion. Enabling table sorting You can enable column sorting and set sorting defaults for GST, RST, RTT, and Trouble Ticket table reports. To enable table sorting: Chapter 6. Configuring reports 145

156 1. Expand sort. 2. Double-click enable to access the list of alues. 3. Choose true if you want to enable table sorting. Choose false if you do not want to enable sorting. 4. Double-click ascending to access the list of alues. 5. Choose true if you want to set the default sort direction to ascending. Choose false if do not want to set the default sort direction to ascending. 6. Double-click orderby to access the list of alues. 7. Highlight the alue you want to use as the default sort criterion. 8. Click the alue to select it. The alue displays in the orderby text box. Adding a hyperlink image You can add an image to the end of each row of your GST report to sere as a hyperlink to additional information. Before you begin For example, you can add an image that links to a static HTML page describing the SLA contract. Store the image you want to use on the serer in the Images directory. To add a hyperlink image: 1. Expand group. 2. Expand image. 3. Double-click link to access the text box. 4. Enter the URL for the page you want to link to the image. For example: 5. Double-click location to access the text box. 6. Enter the path to the serer Image directory. For example,../objectstore/ Images/<imagename>. Adding upscale naigation links You can add upscale naigation links to your reports. To enable or disable upscale naigation options: 1. Expand DownScaleNa. The naigation options are as follows: Option Monthly: true Description Daily naigation links display on weekly, monthly, quarterly, yearly, and 14 monthly reports. 146 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

157 Option Monthly: false Quarterly: true Quarterly: false Weekly: true Weekly: false Yearly: true Yearly: false 14 month: true 14 month: false Description Daily naigation links do not display on weekly, monthly, quarterly, yearly, and 14 monthly reports. Monthly naigation links display on quarterly, yearly, and 14 monthly reports. Monthly naigation links do not display on quarterly, yearly, and 14 monthly reports. Quarterly naigation links display on yearly and 14 monthly reports. Quarterly naigation links do not display on yearly and 14 monthly reports. Weekly naigation links for daily reports display on monthly, quarterly, yearly, and 14 monthly reports. Weekly naigation links do not display on monthly, quarterly, yearly, and 14 monthly reports. Yearly naigation links display on the 14 monthly report. Yearly naigation links do not display on the 14 monthly report. 2. Expand the naigation options to disable. For example, expand monthly. The enable text box opens displaying the current alue, which indicates whether enabling is true or false. The default alue is true. 3. Double-click enable to access the list. 4. Click the down arrow to display both alues, true and false. 5. Highlight the alue you want and left-click. The new alue displays in the text box. Adding downscale naigation links You can add downscale naigation links to your reports. To enable or disable downscale naigation options: 1. Expand UpScaleNa. The naigation options are as follows: Option Daily: true Description Monthly naigation links display on daily and weekly reports. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 147

158 Option Daily: false Monthly: true Monthly: false Quarterly: true Quarterly: false Weekly: true Weekly: false Yearly: true Yearly: false Description Monthly naigation links do not display on daily and weekly reports. Quarterly naigation links display on daily, weekly, and monthly reports. Quarterly naigation links do not display on daily, weekly, and monthly reports. Weekly naigation links display on daily reports. Weekly naigation links do not display on daily reports. Yearly naigation links display on the daily, weekly, monthly, and quarterly reports. Yearly naigation links do not display on the daily, weekly, monthly, and quarterly reports. 14 month naigation links display on daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, and yearly reports. 14 month naigation links display on daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, and yearly reports. 2. Expand the naigation options to disable. For example, expand monthly. The enable text box opens displaying the current alue, which indicates whether enabling is true or false. The default alue is true. 3. Double-click enable to access the list. 4. Click the down arrow to display both alues, true and false. 5. Highlight the alue you want and left-click. The new alue displays in the text box. Restricting time naigation You can lock the reporting period for some reports, which preents the user from naigating to a different period. For example, you can specify that a report is only aailable for a yearly reporting period. The user cannot use the naigation links or the Calendar to change the period. To restrict the reporting period: 1. Expand ReportAccess. 2. Expand RelatieDate. 3. Expand current. 148 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

159 4. Double-click enable to access the list. 5. Click the down arrow to display both alues, true and false. 6. Highlight the alue you want and left-click. The new alue displays in the text box. 7. Expand TimePeriod. 8. Expand the time period you want to set. 9. Double-click enable to access the drop-down list. 10. Click the down arrow to display both alues, true and false. 11. Highlight the alue you want and left-click. The new alue displays in the text box. Setting time series granularity You can set data granularity for group and resource time series line charts. Users drill down to a time series chart from a higher-leel report. Before you begin You can use the following time series parameters for setting data granularity: TimeSeriesGranularity Sets data granularity for all time series charts of a specified type associated with the reporter. You can only set the granularity for one type of chart. For example, if you set the granularity for a daily time series chart, all other chart types still display the granularity set by the system administrator or the user. Granularity Sets data granularity for a specific time series chart mediator. This parameter lets you assign a granularity for an indiidual chart that is different from the granularity set for the other charts in the reporter. Entering a alue for this parameter oerrides the alues entered by the system administrator or the user. Note: Daily and weekly group time series charts do not support raw data granularity. Adance group time series charts are restricted to a granularity of one week or less. (If you try to set the granularity to one month, it is changed to one week and a message displayed on the serer console). To set time series data granularity: 1. Locate the time-series report you want to edit or choose a time-series reporter style sheet from the Select a StyleSheet window if creating a reporter. Time series reports typically include the words ChartDrillown or Group6Chart in their name. 2. Edit the TimeSeriesGranularity parameter: a. Double-click the time series reporter. b. Expand TimeSeriesGranularity. c. Double-click the type of report to which you want to apply the data granularity. For example, double-click weekly. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 149

160 d. Choose the granularity option to apply to the time series chart. The alue displays in the weekly field. 3. To edit the Granularity parameter: a. Expand the ChartNMediator. For example, expand Chart1Mediator. b. Expand Granularity. A list of report types displays. c. Double-click the report type to access the granularity options. For example, double-click monthly. d. Choose the granularity option you want from the list. The alue displays in the option field. Configuring AGTS and GTS reports for High Performance Data Acquisition You can enable the High Performance Data Acquisition (HPDA) feature in AGTS and GTS reports. Before you begin By default the refresh rate is set to 0 seconds. Consider configuring and testing reports that required HPDA before enabling HPDA. This ensures that the report is working correctly before you assign an agent to look after the data model. The report should specify a default granularity and not allow the user preferences to oerride this granularity. In addition HPDA should only be used if NRT is enabled. The following notes and limitations apply to HPDA: HPDA is currently limited to sericing a maximum of 10 agents, which means that the combination of reports and groups that can be sericed by HPDA is limited to 10. For example one report can be deployed on 10 groups or 10 reports can be deployed against one group. Latency can exist between the agent and browser refresh rates. Since the agent starts independently of the browser refresh rate, the agent applies a best effort algorithm to ensure that the data model is updated in time for the next browser refresh. Howeer since the refresh rate of the browser can ary, then the browser can miss an update. Multiple client browsers pointing to the same report deployed at the same group are sericed by the same agent/ data model. Latency can exist between the agent and browser refresh rates. Since the agent starts independently of the browser refresh rate, the agent applies a best effort algorithm to ensure that the data model is updated in time for the next browser refresh. Howeer since the refresh rate of the browser can ary, then the browser can miss an update. As long as the refresh rate set in the reporter and the refresh rate of the browser are equialent, then the browser can at most need to wait two refresh cycles before seeing an update. If HPDA is enabled before the reporter is reconfigured the user must close out all browsers that use the report and wait six times the refresh rate before iewing the report again (for example if the refresh rate is set to 60 seconds, the user must wait 6 minutes). This is the time required by the system to clear cache and repopulate the report with HPDA enabled. To enable the HPDA feature in AGTS and GTS reports: 150 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

161 1. In the GTS reporter, select the NearRealTimeRefreshRate parameter. 2. Set the alue to be greater than 0. The GTS.NearRealTime.RefreshRate parameter sets the time in seconds that the report is to be refreshed. Resource Summary Table display filters You can filter the display of Resource Summary Tables (RSTs), include the filtering criteria in the table legend, and suppress the creation of the RST if no results are returned. When filtering RSTs, if you set the RemoeEmptyRows parameter to false in the RST reporter, some resources with empty metric alues can still be filtered out and not display. Filtering RSTs by family and properties RSTs can be filtered by families and properties the same way as Multi-Resource Time Series reports. Filtering the display of RSTs by metric range You can filter the display of Resource Summary Tables (RSTs) by metric range. Before you begin Note: When filtering RSTs, if you set the RemoeEmptyRows parameter to FALSE in the RST reporter, some resources with empty metric alues can be still be filtered out and not display. To filter the display of RSTs by metric range: 1. In a Resource Distribution chart reporter, configure a drill down to an RST, specifying resources that fall within a particular metric/statistical range. If a metric or statistic in the Distribution Chart is not configured in the RST drill-down, it is added to the query and made aailable through CSV export, but will not display in the RST. 2. In the corresponding RST reporter, expand the statstablemediator parameter to reeal the userangefromurl parameter. 3. The userangefromurl is a Boolean, and can be set to either true or false (the default). If true the filter is enabled, and only those resources within the specified range display in the RST. If false, the filter is disabled. 4. RSTs can be filtered by families and properties the same way as Multi-Resource Time Series reports. 5. To display filters in RST legends: a. In the corresponding RST reporter, expand the statstable.legend parameter to reeal the withfilters and withoutfilters parameters. b. The suppresstableempty parameter is a Boolean, and can be set to either true or false (the default), If true, the RST is not displayed if the filtering results in an empty table. If false, the RST is displayed, een if the filtering results in an empty table. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 151

162 Displaying filters in RST legends You can set an RST legend to display the RST filter in use. To display a legend in an RST: 1. In the corresponding RST reporter, expand the statstable.legend parameter to reeal the withfilters and withoutfilters parameters. 2. Set the legend parameters to be used from these options: Option withfilters Description Text that displays the type of filter being applied. Can be used with the ariable $FILTER_METRIC_NAME, which is only supported for this parameter and only when filtering metric data. The $FILTER_METRIC_NAME ariable resoles to the metric ID of $URL_METRIC. The alue is determined from the header label in the RST or, if the header is undefined, from the database. Important: Only use the $FILTER_METRIC_NAME ariable when the RST is filtered by a metric or statistical alue and not by a family or property. withoutfilters Text to be used when no filter is applied to the RST. Suppressing empty tables You can suppress RSTs if the filtering criteria results in an empty table. To configure an RST to suppress empty tables: 1. In the RST reporter, expand the statstable parameter to reeal the suppresstableempty parameter. 2. The suppresstableempty parameter is a Boolean, and can be set to either true or false (the default), as follows: Option true false Description The RST is not displayed if the filtering results in an empty table. The RST is displayed, een if the filtering results in an empty table. 152 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

163 Remoing the resource count in GST reports You can remoe the resource count that displays next to the group name in a GST report. Before you begin Note: The resource count is not shown for quarterly, yearly, or 14-monthly reports. To remoe the resource count: 1. With a GST reporter open, expand groupsummarytable. 2. Expand group. 3. Double-click showresourcecount to access a list of alues. 4. Select false if you do not want the resource count to display. The default alue is true. Adding a sum row You can add a row to a Group Summary Table, Resource Summary Table, or TopN group, resource and formula report in which each cell stores the sum (total) of its associated column. Before you begin You can add a label for the row, display the row at the top or at the bottom of a table, and hae the cell remain blank if no alue is aailable. If a GST report displays threshold information, the total for the threshold count (burst, period, proactie) displays in the sum row. The threshold count total depends on the user profile. Note: For RST reports with multiple pages, the sum row displays on the currently displayed page with the sum in each column representing the total of the alues for just that page. To add a sum row: 1. Open the Group Summary Table, Resource Summary Table, or TopN reporter. 2. Expand the table parameter for the reporter. Table parameter names can include, depending on the reporter type: groupsummarytable statstable TopNTableN (TopNTable1, TopNTable2, and so on) 3. Expand SumRow. 4. Expand display. 5. Choose where you want the sum row to display on the table. a. To display the sum row at the bottom of the table, double-click bottom to access the list of alues. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 153

164 b. Choose true from the list of alues. c. Ensure that the top parameter has the alue false. d. To display the sum row at the top of the table, double-click top to access the list of alues. e. Choose true from the list of alues. f. Ensure the bottom parameter has the alue false. 6. To display a label for the sum row, double-click label to access the text box. 7. Enter the label text you want to display at the beginning of the sum row. If you do not enter text, the default alue Total displays. Label text is right-aligned. 8. To enter the label you want to display in the sum row if no sum is aailable for a column, double-click NoValueTag to access the text box. Note: Only the sum and count statistics can generate a alue in the sum row. To display a blank cell when no sum is aailable for a column, enter the escape sequence. 9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 for each table of a TopN report that you want to display a sum row. Customizing user information about reports Customize reports to display a range of user information. User information to display on reports Customer information can include the following: UserLogin to enter the user login name you want displayed on the report. UserLogo to enter the name of the static or the custom graphic you want displayed on the report. To display a custom graphic on the report, you need to enter a property you hae defined by using the resmgr command. UserWelcome to enter text or a link as a welcome message to display on the report. Displaying user login on reports Edit the UserLogin parameter to contain the user name you want to show on a report. 1. Expand User Login. 2. Double-click link to access the text edit box. 3. Enter the address to the Web site or page you want to use as a link. 4. Press Enter. The address displays in the link text box. 5. Double-click text to access the text edit box. 6. Enter the text you want associated with the link. 7. Press Enter. The text displays in the text box. Displaying a user logo on reports You can customize user information that displays on the resource group results pane when iewed on the portal. To display a user logo graphic: 154 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

165 1. Expand UserLogo. 2. Expand default if you want a static image to display on the report. If you want a custom image to display on the report, enter a user property in the image option under UserLogo. 3. Choose an option: a. Double-click the image option under default to enter the name of the graphic file (including path) for the default image. The default image displays if no user property is entered or if the property was not assigned to a user. b. Double-click the image option under UserLogo to enter the user property. For example, $USERPROPERTY:propertyname where propertyname is the property defined for the user. 4. Double-click the link option that corresponds to the image to enter a URL if you want that image to become a hyperlink. Displaying a user welcome message on reports You can enter text or a link as a welcome message to display on the report. To display a user welcome message: 1. Expand UserWelcome. 2. Double-click link. 3. Enter the Web site or page. The address displays in the link text box. 4. Double-click text to access the text edit box. 5. Enter the text you want associated with the link. The text displays in the text box. Restricting customer access to reports You can suppress reports for SLA users based on a date, known as the Restrict Access Date (RAD,) until alidation of the report occurs. Before you begin The report is only suppressed from user with the SLA profile. First, define a property to indicate the RAD by using the resmgr command. Enter the property you hae defined. The format for the date defined by therestrictaccessdate property is yyyy.mm.dd (for example, for 2nd May 2009). To suppress reports based on date: 1. Expand restrictaccessdate. 2. Double-click property to access the Property Selection window. The Property Selection window displays all properties defined within Netcool/Proiso. 3. Scroll through the list to locate the RAD property. 4. Click the property name to select it. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 155

166 5. Click Sae. Display text or links in results This section explains how to display text or hyperlinks on the reporter page. This information applies to: Report summary information Report title Report start time Trouble Ticket report heading and labels Displaying report summary information You can display text or hyperlinks on the reporter page for report summary information. To add a report summary link or text: 1. To add a report summary link: a. Expand reportsummary(line2) to expand it. b. Double-click link to access the text edit box. c. Enter the address of the site or page to which you want to link. For example: The address displays in the link text box. d. Double-click text to access the text edit box. e. Enter the text you want associated with the link. The text displays in the text box. 2. To add report summary text: a. Expand reportsummary. b. Double-click text to access the text edit box. c. Enter either the text you want for a summary or enter one or more ariables. If combining ariables, include spaces between ariable names. The text or ariables you entered display in the text field. Displaying a report title You can display text or hyperlinks on the reporter page for a report title. To add a report title link or text: 1. To add a report title link: a. Expand reporttitle(line1), orreporttitle(titleofpage). b. Double-click text to access the text edit box. c. Enter the address of the site or page to which you want to link. For example, The address displays in the link text box. 156 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

167 d. Double-click text to access the text edit box. e. Enter the title text. The text displays in the text box. 2. To add a report title link: a. Expand reporttitle. b. Double-click text to access the text edit box. c. Enter text or one or more ariables. If combining ariables, include spaces between ariable names. The text or ariables you entered display in the text field. Displaying the report start time You can display text or hyperlinks on the reporter page for the start time. To enter a link or text as the start time: 1. To enter a link as the start time: a. Expand starttime. b. Double-click text to access the text edit box. c. Enter the address of the site or page to which you want to link. For example, The address displays in the link text box. d. Double-click text to access the text edit box. e. Enter the text. The text displays in the text box. 2. To enter text as the start time: a. Expand starttime. b. Double-click text to access the text edit box. c. Enter either the text you want for a summary or enter one or more ariables. The text or ariables you entered display in the text field. Adding a heading and labels for Trouble Ticket tables You can add a heading for the Trouble Ticket table and create labels for the two ticket counts displayed at the bottom of the table. The ticket count alues are automatically calculated at report generation. Before you begin One ticket count represents the total number of eligible rows found by the query during report generation. The other ticket count represents the number of tickets returned by the query after a filter (if any) is applied. If no filter was applied, the two counts are the same. Note: This functionality is only aailable for reporters based on the PVLsContractTicketTable style sheet installed by Netcool/Proiso Technology Packs or on Trouble Ticket style sheets customized for you. To add a heading and labels for Trouble Ticket tables. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 157

168 1. Expand Headings. 2. Double-click title to access the text box. 3. Enter the text you want to display as the heading for the table in the report. For example, SLA Releant Accumulated Serice Outage. 4. Expand summary. 5. Double-click FilteredRowsLabel to access the text box. 6. Enter the text you want to display as the label for the alue generated after a filter (if any) is applied to the results. For example, enter SLA Releant Trouble Tickets to indicate the count represents just the tickets releant to SLA were displayed, out of all eligible tickets. If no filter was applied, the count displayed matches the other, total, count. 7. Double-click TotalRowsLabel to access the text box. 8. Enter the text you want to display as the label for the alue generated by the query during report generation. For example, enter Total Number of Trouble Tickets to indicate the count represents all eligible tickets. Add a resource name heading to a Contract Summary Table report You can add a resource name heading in a Contract Summary Table (CST) report. Before you begin Note: This functionality is only aailable for reporters based on the PVLsContractSummaryTable style sheet. To edit the resource name heading: 1. Expand headings. 2. Double-click title to access the text box. 3. Enter either the text you want for a title or enter one or more ariables. If combining ariables, include spaces between ariable names. The text or ariables you entered display in the text box. Choosing an alternate page for suppressed reports If a report is suppressed a default HTML page is displayed. You can change the default suppressed reports page to an alternate page. To choose an alternate page: 1. Double-click the text PVRpSuppressed.html. An editable text box opens. 2. Enter the name of the page you want to display if the report is suppressed. The filename extension must be HTM or HTML. 158 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

169 Configuring how reports are deployed This section explains how to configure the deployment of reports. Before you begin This table shows the recommended deployment options for different types of reports. Report GST Baseline Distribution Rank Variation RST RTT Resource Time Series Group Time Series and Adanced Group Time Series TopN/BottomN Deployment All groups or resources in a group. A single group or resource. See the Recommended deployment for Distribution reports table. All groups or resources in a group. All groups or resources in a group. All groups or resources in a group. A single group or resource. All groups or resources in a group. See the Recommended deployment for TopN/BottomN reports table. This table shows the recommended deployment options for Distribution reports. Distribution Report groupratio alue Number of Metrics Recommended Deployment resource false one All groups or resources in group. group true one All groups or resources in group. resource formula false multiple A single group or resource. group formula true multiple All groups or resources in group. resource distribution across ranges NA one All groups or resources in group. This table shows the recommended deployment options for TopN/BottomN reports. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 159

170 Report Deployment resource All groups or resources in group. group All groups or resources in group. formula A single group or resource. filtered All groups or resources in group. To deploy reports: 1. Click the down-arrow in the Deployment window. A list shows second deployment options in addition to the default All groups or resources in group. 2. Make a selection based on the guidance in the preious tables. Adding a comment You can enter or edit descriptie information about the reporter that displays when the reporter is selected in DataView Naigator. Working with charts To enter a comment: 1. Click inside the Comment text box and enter text for a descriptie comment. 2. Click outside the Comment text box when finished. When designing reports, you can use these options to configure your charts. Using charts in reports This table lists the types of charts best suited to display different types of information in reports. Query Plot Scatterplot Bar Stacked Bar Area Stacked Area Pie Time series (simple metrics and simple statistics) X X X X 160 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

171 Query Plot Scatterplot Bar Stacked Bar Area Stacked Area Pie Times Series (multiple metrics and multiple statistics) X X Time series (simple statistics) Baseline (View 1: current period of metric) Baseline (View 2: baseline) Top N/Bottom N Rank Variation X X X X* X X X X X X X X X Ratio X * Each stack represents one metric. Do not use multiple statistics in stacked charts. X-axis labeling This table shows the rules that apply to the display of the x-axis time formats in charts. Time Sequence X-axis Display More than fie years yyyy (for example 2000, 2001, or 2002) One to fie years MMM yy (for example Aug 2005, Aug 2006, or Aug 2007) Three months to one year MMM (for example Aug, Sep, or Oct) Four weeks to three months MMM dd (for example Aug 10, Aug 16, oraug 22) Seen days to four weeks EE dd (for example Sun 28, Mon 29, or Tue 30) Chapter 6. Configuring reports 161

172 Time Sequence One to seen days X-axis Display EE HH:mm (for example Sun 01:00, Sun 07:00, or Sun 13:00) One to 24 hours HH:mm (for example 10:00, 12:00, or 14:00) One hour or less HH:mm:ss (for example 10:00:50, 10:01:00, or 10:01:10) Note the following: The number of labels depends on the following: The min-max of the X axis The orientation of the axis and labels The font for labeling The size of the chart area The display code generates the labels, then determines what labels to display to ensure the best layout possible without oerlapping labels. Formatting a chart legend Format a chart legend by choosing from the default format ariables. Before you begin This table shows the default chart legend formats. Chart Type Adanced GTS Baseline Label Distribution Group Time Series (GTS) Group/Resource Metric Ratio Percentile Label Resource Time Series Default Legend Format $METRIC:$EXTERNAL_STATISTIC:$GRANULARITY:$INTERNAL_STATISTIC $METRIC:$STATISTIC:$GRANULARITY $STATISTIC:$RANGE $METRIC:$STATISTIC:$GRANULARITY $METRIC:$RATIO $METRIC:$PERCENTILE:$LEVEL:$GRANULARITY $RESOURCE_NAME:$METRIC:$STATISC:$GRANULARITY For example, a Percentile Label chart legend using the default format ($METRIC:$PERCENTILE:$LEVEL:$GRANULARITY), can display as Inbound Throughput (bps): percentile:1:d. Change the default format of a chart legend by defining customlabels reporter properties. This table shows supported legend ariables by chart type. Time Series Baseline Label Percentile Adanced Label GST Ratio Metric Ratio Distribution $EXTERNAL_STATISTIC X 162 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

173 Time Series Baseline Label Percentile Adanced Label GST Ratio $GRANULARITY X X X X $INTERNAL_STATISTIC X $LEVEL X $METRIC X X X X X $PERCENTILE X $RANGE $RATIO Metric Ratio X Distribution X $RESOURCE_NAME X X X X X X X $STATISTIC X X X To change the default legend format for a chart: 1. Create a new or access an existing reporter. 2. From the reporter, click the customlabels other properties check box. Click the property to create a chart legend. You can use these supported ariables based on the chart type. The following properties control the chart legend text: Option seriesformat percentileformat baselineformat Description Used for the main series on all charts. Used in addition to the seriesformat property when a percentile is expressed. Used in addition to the seriesformat property when a baseline is expressed. 3. Click the property to create a chart legend. Only those legend ariables supported by a particular chart type are displayed. 4. Optional: In the text label properties, add your text. Example For example, you might want to create labels for Critical and Warning thresholds for a particular metric, as follows: formulalabel01 = Outbound criticallabel = Critical Threshold warninglabel = Warning Threshold Chapter 6. Configuring reports 163

174 Extending the chart area You can extend the chart area to ensure that complex charts remain readable. Before you begin If you design a chart that displays many metrics, or has an oerlarge header or footer, the chart can become unreadable. Often a legend, header, or footer can become much larger than the space allocated to the chart area. To preent this problem, you can set the autoresize parameter to true (the default is false). For the autoresize parameter to work, the legend must be anchored in one of the following positions: SOUTH SOUTHEAST SOUTHWEST When enabled, the autoresize parameter causes the ertical space allocated to the chart area is increased. The chart area is extended equal to the distance from the top of the legend to the bottom of the chart component. Charts that display metrics that ary from day to day can hae a strikingly different appearance as the user naigates through the different days. If this ariation is a concern, consider reworking the report. To extend the chart area: 1. Expand to see the chart parameters. 2. Set the autoresize parameter to true. Chart titles Chart titles can be plain text or HTML, or can contain special start and end time ariables. Adding plain text chart titles The default display of title text on a report is determined by the chart style, and is a single color on one line. Before you begin If you need to modify title formatting, specify an HTML title instead. To add a plain text chart title: 1. Expand the Chart entry for the chart you are editing. For example, open Chart1. 2. Double-click I to access the text box. 3. Enter the text for the title, including one or more ariables if required. If combining ariables, include spaces between ariable names. 4. Press Enter. The text or ariables you entered display in the text field. 164 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

175 Adding HTML chart titles Use HTML if you need to split a chart title oer more that one line, or to change the font size or color of the title. Before you begin The following points apply to HTML markup for chart titles: The markup must begin with <HTML> and end with </HTML>. The HTML markup is not case sensitie. Using HTML for a chart title oerrides the chart style for the title, including font and color options. Be sure to specify font and color in your HTML string. To enter HTML for a chart title: 1. Double-click in the Title field. 2. Enter the HTML markup as one line. 3. To edit the title at any time, double-click in the Title field, and the HTML code is redisplayed. Using start and end time ariables in chart titles You can use special start time and end time ariables that apply only to chart titles. These special ariables are primarily of use in sliding window time series reports, to show the exact start and end times of the period coered. For most chart titles, the $START_TIME and $END_TIME ariables are sufficient. These ariables resole to the month, day, and year of the start and end day of the report period, with the day considered as starting at midnight. For certain reports such as sliding window time series reports, the $START_TIME and $END_TIME ariables are not granular enough. Time series reports might show a series of eents oer a 48-hour or one-week time window whose end point is the present time. Thus, a sliding window report always shows the last time period, such as the last 48 hours, no matter when the report is iewed. There are two alternate start and end time ariables, $ST and $ET. These ariables are only alid in chart titles and are not recognized in other reporter fields. $ST and $ET resole to a timestamp for the exact day, date, and time for the beginning and end of the report period. The date and time format uses the locale of the browser, so that dates are localized. The default time stamp is in the following format: EEE,MMM d yyyy, HH:mm:ss. For example, Fri, Jan , 12:00:00. The format of the time stamp displayed by $ST and $ET can be modified with the assistance of IBM Professional Serices. You can combine the use of $ST and $ET with HTML formatting to show the timestamps on a separate line with reduced font. Chapter 6. Configuring reports 165

176 For example, <html><center><fontsize=+2color="#000099" face="arial"><b>group Time Series</b></font><BR><fontsize=-1color="#660033" face="arial">start time: $ST<BR>Endtime:$ET</font><html> Oerriding the footer label defined in a chart style You can oerride the footer label specified in the chart style by using the footer parameter. Before you begin You can specify a footer label when defining a chart style. In some cases, howeer, you might want to reuse a chart style but change the footer label. To oerride the footer label defined in a chart style: 1. Open the chart reporter. 2. Click the footer parameter. 3. In the text box that displays enter the label string. Precede the text with a percent sign (%) to hae the text localized. 4. Press Enter. The footer label supports the same $ET and $ST alues as the Title parameter. Choosing a chart style You can change the style of the detail charts associated with a reporter by using the chartstyle and reporterstyle parameters. Before you begin Not all reporters include a chartstyle parameter. The reporterstyle parameter applies to all charts unless you hae chosen a style for the chartstyle parameter. To chose a chart style: 1. Double-click reporterstyle or chartstyle to access the Chart Style Selection window. All aailable reporters are listed. 2. Naigate to the style you want by expanding the folder. 3. Select the style and chose an option: To add the style, click OK. To remoe the style, click Clear. 166 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

177 Chapter 7. Configuring chart styles Chart styles customize the look of your detailed chart reports. Charts and chart styles are created by the content designer, and are then made aailable to you in DataView Naigator. The chart style designer proides a demo feature which allows you to preiew chart styles on a sample chart contained in the chart style window. This figure describes the different parts of a chart. Each chart component is labeled to identify the different parts. Creating chart styles Use the chart properties window to create chart styles. To create a chart style: 1. In DataView Naigator, select the folder where you want to store the style. 2. From the File menu, choose New Style. 3. Enter a name for the style. The style name is prefixed with an asterisk to indicate you need to sae it. 4. Sae the style. 5. Double-click the style name to access the chart properties window. The chart properties window opens. The styles you can edit are listed in the left pane. A sample chart displays in the bottom pane of the window. As you edit style alues, preiew your changes on the sample chart. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

178 6. Edit any of the following chart styles: Chart to edit foreground and background colors, whether those colors are opaque, and what type of chart border you want. Views to define the isual aspect of the data displayed in the chart by customizing properties for the series of data points, to define the properties of the lines that indicate threshold warnings (warning and critical) in the chart, and to define the properties of the lines that indicate properties in the chart. Axes to alter the orientation, annotation, labels, fonts, and interals of the axes for a chart. Area to define the appearance of the plot and chart area. Legend to set the text orientation (horizontal or ertical), color and font used for the legend text. Header to set whether you want a header to display, and the text location, color and font used for the header text. Footer to set the label, text positioning, color, and font used for the footer text. Setting the preiew chart size You can set the preiew chart size. Before you begin Consider setting the size to the same alues that are defined in the style sheet. The alues you enter here do not affect the size of the report charts as they display in the browser. To set the preiew chart size: In the preiew pane, enter a alue in the Width and Height fields. Editing chart report parameters You can edit the isual elements of the data that displays in the charts by editing the View attributes. A iew is a set of series and each series contains a set of data. Each of the data sets contains a line property and a symbol property. Before you begin Views include: Metrics-statistics You can customize the properties for up to eight series of data points. Use for raw data and statistics. Baseline You can customize the properties for up to four series of data. Use to display statistics when creating baseline charts. 168 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

179 Baseline Deiation You can customize the properties for up to four series of data. Use to display statistics when creating baseline charts. Threshold Displays threshold properties, not collected data, and plots only lines for the data set properties warning and critical. The threshold properties are like the properties displayed in the property for the data set. Properties Displays the first four property lines. Percentiles Network Analysis Accessing report parameters You access report parameters from the Chart Properties window. To access report parameters: 1. From the Chart Properties window, expand Views. The View options display. 2. Edit any of the supported parameters by clicking the parameter. Choosing a chart type You choose a chart type by selecting a iew option. Before you begin This table shows the supported chart styles. Chart Type plot scatter-plot bar Description Draws each series as connected points of data. Series appearance is determined by chart style line color, symbol shape, size, and color properties. Draws each series as unconnected points of data. Series appearance is determined by chart style, symbol shape, size, and color properties. Draws each series as a bar in a cluster. The number of clusters depends on the number of points in the data. Each cluster displays the nth point in each series. The x axis is typically annotated with point labels (1, 2, 3, and so on, for TopN). The series appearance is determined by style fill color and image properties. A 3D effect can be applied to bar charts by using depth, eleation, and rotation properties. Chapter 7. Configuring chart styles 169

180 stacking-bar Stacking-bar charts can be used but are currently not adapted for the types of queries used. Draws each series as a portion of a stacked bar cluster, the number of clusters being the number of data points. Each cluster displays the nth point in each series. The x axis is typically annotated with point labels. The series appearance is determined by the chart style fill color property. A 3D effect can be applied to bar charts by using depth, eleation, and rotation properties. area stacking-area Draws each series as connected points of data, filled below the points. Each series is layered oer the preceding series. The series appearance is determined by the chart style fill color property. Stacking-bar charts can be used but are currently not adapted for types of queries used. Draws each series as connected points of data, filled below the points. Places each nth series on top of the last one to show the area relationships between each series and the total. The series appearance is determined by the chart style fill color property. pie Draws each series as a slice of a pie. The number of slices comes from the number of points in the data (alues below a certain threshold can be grouped into another slice). Each pie displays the nth point in each series. Pies are annotated with point labels only. The series appearance is determined by chart style fill color property. A 3D effect can be applied to bar charts by using depth, eleation, and rotation properties. To choose a chart type: 1. In the Views folder, expand any of the supported iews, for example Metric Stats. 2. Click general. The Chart Type Selection pane opens. 3. From the Type list, select a chart type. The chart displays in the preiew section of the window. 4. Select Visible to display the data points in the chart. 5. Select In Legend to display data points in the chart legend. 170 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

181 Formatting series lines You can format the color, size, and style of series lines, depending on the chart type. To format series lines: 1. Expand a series, for example series Click line. The Line Properties window opens. 3. Edit the line properties: Line Color Size, if you chose plot as the chart type Style, if you chose plot as the chart type Editing line color You can edit the line color. To edit line color: 1. Click the color box next to Line Color to access the Line Color window. 2. Click the Swatches tab. 3. To select a new color, click a box in the color grid. The Preiew pane displays your color choice and the Recent grid displays the color in the top left block. 4. Click OK to sae the color change. The color change shows on the preiew chart at the bottom of the window. Editing HSB alues You can edit HSB alues. To edit HSB alues: 1. Click the square color box next to Foreground (or Background) to access the Line Color window. 2. Click the HSB tab. The HSB tab contains a color palette, text entry boxes for hue (H), saturation (S), and brightness (B) and display boxes for red (R), green (G), and blue (B) alues. RGB (red, green, and blue): a system for representing the colors in your display. Red, green, and blue are combined in arious proportions to produce any color in the isible spectrum. Leels of red, green, and blue can each range from 0 to 100 percent of full intensity. Each leel is represented by the range of decimal numbers from 0 to 255 (256 leels for each color). The total number of aailable colors is 256 x 256 x 256, or 16,777,216 possible colors. Chapter 7. Configuring chart styles 171

182 HSB (hue, saturation, and brightness): aspects of color in the RGB scheme. All possible colors can be specified according to hue, saturation, and brightness. 3. Edit the alues for hue, saturation, and brightness by following one of the following methods: a. Selecting from the color palette. Left-click and hold the mouse button while moing the icon in the color palette to select a color. b. Entering specific alues. For example, edit the alue for hue (H) by clicking the H radio button for the alue to select it. Enter a new alue. The R, G, and B alues change to reflect the changes made to H, S, or B. Also the slide next to the color bar moes to reflect your edits. 4. Click OK to apply your changes, Cancel to exit out of the window without applying changes or Reset to change the color back to the original. 5. View your choice in the preiew section of the window. Editing RGB alues You can edit RGB alues. Before you begin RGB (red, green, and blue) is a system for representing the colors in your display. Red, green, and blue are combined in arious proportions to produce any color in the isible spectrum. Leels of red, green, and blue can each range from 0 to 100 percent of full intensity. Each leel is represented by the range of numbers from 0 to 255 (256 leels for each color). The total number of aailable colors is 256 x 256 x 256, or 16,777,216 possible colors. To edit RGB alues: 1. Click the square color box next to Foreground (or Background) to access the color selection window. 2. Click the RGB tab. The RGB tab contains three sliders to use for changing the alues. The alues display in the boxes next to each slider. 3. Left-click on the slider bar and moe it to the alue you want or enter a alue in the display box next to the slider. The new alues display next to the slider. You can reiew the results of your choice in the Preiew pane. 4. Click OK to apply your changes, Cancel to exit out of the window without applying changes or Reset to change the color back to the original. 5. View your choice in the preiew section of the window. Editing line size If you chose plot as a chart type, you can edit the line size. To edit line size: In the Line Properties pane, enter a pixel alue for the line. The pixel alue is applied to the chart line for that series. 172 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

183 Formatting the line style If you chose plot as a chart type, you can format the line style. To format the line style: 1. With the Line Properties pane open, click the down arrow next to Style to see a list of line styles. 2. Click a line style to select it. The style is applied to the chart line for that series. Formatting series symbols If you chose plot or scatter-plot as the chart type, you can format the series symbols. Before you begin The edits you make here control the symbol used to represent points in a data series, used in plot or scatter plot charts. To format series symbols: 1. With a series expanded, for example series 0.3, click symbol. The Symbol Properties window opens. 2. To format symbol type: a. With the Symbol Properties pane open, click the down arrow to access a list of symbol types. b. Click to select the symbol type you want. The type is applied to the chart symbols for that series. 3. To format symbol size: a. With the Symbol Properties pane open, enter a pixel alue in the Size field. The pixel size is applied to the symbol for that series. Formatting baseline, properties, percentiles, and network analysis displays You set the format for Baseline, Properties, Percentiles, and Network Analysis displays by configuring the line and symbol parameters. Chapter 7. Configuring chart styles 173

184 Example Formatting threshold warnings You can format the color, size, and style for warning and critical chart lines. To format threshold warnings: 1. Expand Chart Properties Views Threshold. 2. For both warning or critical, with the Line Properties pane open, click the box next to Line Color and select the colors you want. 174 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

185 3. For both warning or critical, with the Line Properties pane open, enter a pixel alue for the line. The pixel alue is applied to the chart line for that threshold. 4. For both warning or critical, with the Line Properties pane open, click the down arrow next to Style and select a line style. The style is applied to the chart line for that threshold. Formatting the baseline deiation display Set the format for baseline deiation by configuring the area, boundary, and mean parameters. To format the display for baseline deiation: 1. Expand Baseline Deiation. 2. Click area. The Line Properties pane opens. 3. Click the Boundary Color button to edit the boundary color. The Boundary Color window opens. 4. Edit the boundary color properties and click OK. 5. Click boundary. The Line Properties window opens. 6. Edit the line properties and click OK. 7. Click mean. TheLine Properties window opens. 8. Edit the line properties and click OK. Editing chart appearance parameters You can edit the foreground and background colors by choosing from a color grid and also by editing the RGB and the HSB alues of the colors. You can also choose a border for your chart and make some types of borders raised. Accessing appearance parameters Access the appearance parameters to edit chart foreground and background colors or the chart border. To access the appearance parameters: 1. Expand Chart Properties Charts. 2. Click appearance. The Appearance pane opens aboe the sample chart. 3. Edit any of the foreground and background colors or the chart border. Chapter 7. Configuring chart styles 175

186 Editing foreground and background colors Though the steps are the same for editing the background and foreground colors, the items affected by each differ. Before you begin Foreground color affects: Legend Axis and axis title Bounding box around plot area Background color affects: Chart Chart area Plot area Legend Header Footer The background color is applied to all the items in the chart only if you select Opaque. To edit foreground and background colors: 1. Click the square color box next to Foreground (or Background) to access the color selection window. For example: 2. Edit the color: a. Choose a color b. Optional: Edit the HSB alues for the color c. Optional: Edit the RGB alues for the color Choosing a color You can choose a foreground or background color for your charts. To chose a color: 1. Ensure the Swatches tab is selected. 2. Click a box in the color grid to select a new color. The Preiew pane of the window displays your color choice and the Recent grid displays the color in the top left block. 3. Click OK to apply your changes, Cancel to exit out of the window without applying changes, or Reset to change the color back to the original. The color change shows on the preiew chart. Editing HSB alues You can edit HSB alues. 176 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

187 To edit HSB alues: 1. Click the square color box next to Foreground (or Background) to access the Line Color window. 2. Click the HSB tab. The HSB tab contains a color palette, text entry boxes for hue (H), saturation (S), and brightness (B) and display boxes for red (R), green (G), and blue (B) alues. RGB (red, green, and blue): a system for representing the colors in your display. Red, green, and blue are combined in arious proportions to produce any color in the isible spectrum. Leels of red, green, and blue can each range from 0 to 100 percent of full intensity. Each leel is represented by the range of decimal numbers from 0 to 255 (256 leels for each color). The total number of aailable colors is 256 x 256 x 256, or 16,777,216 possible colors. HSB (hue, saturation, and brightness): aspects of color in the RGB scheme. All possible colors can be specified according to hue, saturation, and brightness. 3. Edit the alues for hue, saturation, and brightness by following one of the following methods: a. Selecting from the color palette. Left-click and hold the mouse button while moing the icon in the color palette to select a color. b. Entering specific alues. For example, edit the alue for hue (H) by clicking the H radio button for the alue to select it. Enter a new alue. The R, G, and B alues change to reflect the changes made to H, S, or B. Also the slide next to the color bar moes to reflect your edits. 4. Click OK to apply your changes, Cancel to exit out of the window without applying changes or Reset to change the color back to the original. 5. View your choice in the preiew section of the window. Editing RGB alues You can edit RGB alues. Before you begin RGB (red, green, and blue) is a system for representing the colors in your display. Red, green, and blue are combined in arious proportions to produce any color in the isible spectrum. Leels of red, green, and blue can each range from 0 to 100 percent of full intensity. Each leel is represented by the range of numbers from 0 to 255 (256 leels for each color). The total number of aailable colors is 256 x 256 x 256, or 16,777,216 possible colors. To edit RGB alues: 1. Click the square color box next to Foreground (or Background) to access the color selection window. 2. Click the RGB tab. The RGB tab contains three sliders to use for changing the alues. The alues display in the boxes next to each slider. Chapter 7. Configuring chart styles 177

188 3. Left-click on the slider bar and moe it to the alue you want or enter a alue in the display box next to the slider. The new alues display next to the slider. You can reiew the results of your choice in the Preiew pane. 4. Click OK to apply your changes, Cancel to exit out of the window without applying changes or Reset to change the color back to the original. 5. View your choice in the preiew section of the window. Editing the chart border You can choose a border for your charts. To edit the chart border: 1. From the Appearance window, click the Type down arrow to access a list of border types. 2. Choose the border type you want to use from the list. The border displays in the Preiew pane. If you chose the Titled option, you are prompted to enter a title and the Title field becomes actie. 3. Enter the title text. 4. Optional: Choose the Raised toggle option for Etched or Beeled border types. Accessing and editing 3D parameters You can apply a 3D effect to a bar, stack bar, or ratio chart. Before you begin You can edit the alues for the following 3D parameters: Depth: controls the apparent depth of the chart. The alue represents the depth as a percentage of the width of the chart area. If you enter 0 as a alue, the chart draws in 2D. Eleation: controls the distance aboe the x axis for the 3D effect. The alue represents the number of degrees aboe the x axis that the chart is to be positioned. Rotation: controls the position of the eye relatie to the y axis for the 3D effect. The alue represents the number of degrees to the right of the y axis you want the chart positioned. To access 3D parameters: 1. Expand Chart Properties Charts. 2. Click 3D effect. The 3D parameters window opens. 3. Click 3D effect to actiate the 3D parameters. The default alues display. 4. Enter a alue from 0 to 500 for the depth. 5. Enter a alue from -45 to 45 degrees for the eleation. 6. Enter a alue from -45 to 45 degrees for the rotation. You can see the effect of the alues on the chart in the Preiew pane. 178 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

189 Editing chart axes parameters You can edit the chart axes parameters to set the orientation, labels, fonts, and interals of the axes for a chart. Before you begin You cannot change axes parameters for certain types of chart. For example, a pie chart has no x and y axis. Orientation lets you decide the position of the x and y axes to the plotted data. A typical chart draws the x axis horizontally from left to right and the y axis ertically from bottom to top. You can change the orientation of the entire chart and the direction of each axis. Axis annotation is typically interpreted and drawn in a linear fashion. You can also set an axis to be interpreted logarithmically. You can edit any of the following: Orientation General axes properties Grid styles Text properties The edits you make display on the preiew chart at the bottom of the window. Accessing axes parameters Access the axes parameters to edit the orientation, grid styles, and text properties, plus other general axes properties. To access axes parameters: 1. Select the chart type you want to edit. 2. Expand Chart Properties Axes. 3. Edit any of the following properties: Orientation General axes properties Grid styles Text properties Preiew your edits on the preiew chart at the bottom of the window. Chapter 7. Configuring chart styles 179

190 Editing the axes orientation parameter You can edit the orientation of your charts. To edit the chart orientation: 1. Select the chart type you want to edit. 2. Expand Chart Properties Axes. 3. Click orientation. The Axes Orientation Choice pane is displayed. 4. Select an orientation. The orientation is applied to the sample chart. Editing general axes properties To edit the label titles, minimum and maximum alues, logarithmic display, grid display and isibility. To edit general axes properties: 1. Expand Chart Properties Axes. 2. Expand x axis or y axis. 3. Click general. The General Axes Properties pane opens. 4. Edit any of the following options: Add a title y-axis minimum and maximum alues (Not aailable for x axis) Display axis as logarithmic Display as grid Visibility (toggles axis label and data points on and off) 5. To generate custom labels: a. With the General Axes Properties window open, enter text in the Title field. b. Click the down arrow next to Anchor to display the options for the location of the title. The options are different for the x axis and the y axis. c. Highlight an option to select it. The Anchor option is applied to the custom label. d. Select Visible to display the axis label and data points, or clear Visible to hide them. 6. To edit minimum and maximum alues: a. For the y axis only, clear Automatic scale to edit the minimum and maximum alues. Setting the minimum and maximum alues let the chart automatically determine axis bounds based on the data bounds. If you plan to display the axis logarithmically, you can enter exponential alues. The x-axis scale is calculated automatically. b. Click Automatic scale to set the options. c. Select Visible to display the axis name and data points, or clear Visible to hide them. 7. To display the axes logarithmically: 180 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

191 a. Click Logarithmic to set the axis to be displayed logarithmically (log base 10). For example: Choosing Logarithmic lets you control the compression leel of the data display. 8. To display a grid: a. Select the Show Grid option to display a grid oer the data points. A grid helps you see the exact alue of the data points. Applying Show Grid to the y axis displays the horizontal grid line; to the x axis ertical grid lines are displayed. b. Optionally, click grid style in the left pane to edit the appearance of the grid. Editing the grid style You can edit the grid style. To edit the grid style: 1. With y axis or x axis expanded, click grid style. 2. The Line Properties pane opens. 3. Edit the following line properties: Line Color Size Style Formatting text You can format text. To format text: 1. With x axis or y axis expanded, click text. 2. Select a font for the axis label from the Font list. 3. Enter a size for the axis label font in the Size field. 4. Select the Bold or Italic check boxes to apply highlighting to the axis label font. 5. Select a rotation alue for the axis title from the Rotation list. Accessing and editing chart area parameters You can edit the appearance and text of the plot and chart area. The plot option included here lets you edit the parameters that control the data representation in the plot area, whether bar or line. To access chart area parameters: Chapter 7. Configuring chart styles 181

192 1. To format the chart area and plot appearance, and the plot margins. expand Chart Properties Area. 2. To format chart area appearance: a. With Area expanded, click appearance. b. Format the foreground, background, and plot colors and the chart border. 3. To format plot appearance: a. With Area expanded, expand plot. Click appearance. b. Format the foreground, background, and plot colors and the chart border. 4. To format text: a. With Area expanded, click text. b. Enter your text. 5. Plot margins represent the distance between the boundaries of the plot area and the outer boundaries of the entire chart area. You can manually set the boundaries by entering alues for the top, bottom, left, and right margins or you can hae the margins set automatically for you. To edit the plot area margins: a. With Area expanded, expand plot margin. The Margins pane opens b. To manually set the margins, click Automatic margin to clear the setting. c. Type the margin alues. d. Press the Enter key to apply your changes. Chart parameters for legends, headers, and footers You can define the look of the legend, header, and footer for a chart. About legends A legend shows the isual attributes used for each series in the chart, with text that labels the series. The legend content is generated by the information in the data sources. In order to change the legend content, you need to change the data source information. You can alter the following legend attributes: Foreground color (default color is the foreground color of the chart) Background color (applied only if the Opaque property is selected.) Border Font Orientation (ertical or horizontal) Visibility Location If the chart area lacks the space to display the legend at the location specified, the legend is displayed in a different location to ensure isibility. About headers and footers The header and footer can both contain one or more lines of text, with an optional border. You can edit the following header and footer attributes: Visibility Label text (footer only) Foreground color 182 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

193 Background color Border Font Accessing and editing legend, header, and footer chart parameters Edit parameters such as the appearance, the text, and the location of legends, headers, and footers. You can also label a footer. Before you begin The header label is defined through the DataView Naigator. Each chart drill-down parameter set contains a Title parameter. To access the legend, header, and footer parameters: 1. With the Chart Properties window open, expand Legend, Header, orfooter. 2. To edit the legend, header, or footer, click appearance. The Appearance pane opens. 3. Edit the foreground and background colors, HSB alues, RGB alues, or the chart border. In addition, you can label a footer. 4. To format text, click text. The Text pane opens. 5. Edit the font style, size, and orientation. Editing legend, header, and footer chart parameters You can edit the legend, header, or footer appearance. To edit the legend, header, or footer appearance: 1. With Legend, Header, orfooter open, click appearance. The Appearance window opens aboe the sample chart. 2. Edit the foreground and background colors, HSB alues, RGB alues, or the chart border. Placing chart headers, footers, and legends The Chart Style Editor allows you to specify the location of legends, headers, and footers on a chart. Before you begin This table shows the supported locations for chart headers, footers, and legends. Property Default Location Supported Locations Legend South North, North West, West, South West, South, South East, East, North East Chapter 7. Configuring chart styles 183

194 Property Default Location Supported Locations Header North North, North West, North East Footer South South, South West, South East To specify a location for the legend, header, and footer of a chart: 1. Open the Legend, Header, orfooter property and click location. The Location pane opens. 2. Select a location from the Anchor list. The alue is applied to the chart legend. 3. Select the Visible check box to make the legend, header, or footer isible in the chart. 4. Repeat these steps for the remaining legend, header, or footer properties. Editing footer labels Create and edit footers labels in the Chart Style Designer. Before you begin You can oerride the footer label defined in the Chart Style Designer. Defining the Footer parameter in the chart reporter enables you to reuse the same chart style while specifying different footer tables. The header label is defined through DataView Naigator. Each chart drill-down parameter set contains a Title parameter. Important: The Chart Style Editor does not handle special characters consistently in footer labels. To work around this problem, use the footer report parameter. If you must use the Chart Style Editor and need to display an ampersand, use the HTML syntax (&). The Chart Style Editor displays the HTML syntax, but a plain ampersand displays on the portal. Important: The HTML <font size="x"> attribute does not use the point size for units. To make the text size identical to the setting in the style editor, use the style attribute in the HTML call, as in <html><p style="font-size:12pt">footer</p></ html> To edit footer labels: 1. With Footer expanded, click label. The Label pane opens. 2. Enter the text for your label in the Label field. The label text is applied to the footer. 184 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

195 Appendix A. Configuring specific reports Use this information to configure specific types of reports. Related concepts Chapter 6, Configuring reports, on page 115 Composite Resource Summary Table reports The Composite Resource Summary Table report (CRST) is a summary report that proides information about resources linked by a configuration-based relationship. The CRST reports on those resources that are considered composite subelements. It displays the statistics attached to the different related subelements that comprise the composite subelement in the same report. The composite subelement can list all the subelements that constitute a complete path; such as the Data-Link Connection Identifiers (DLCIs) in a Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC). The DLCIs constitute a path from one DataTerminal Equipment (DTE) deice to another. Netcool/Proiso considers the PVC as a subelement, which in turn points to the DLCI subelements. You can generate a CRST to report up to 10 formulas with their associated relationships for the PVC and DLCIs associated with a specific path. You can define which relationship to associate with a formula to be displayed on the CRST report and maintain the order of the subelements. You can configure and display up to fie relationship properties and the relation-metric-statistics are displayed in adjacent columns. One relationship is associated with each property. Configuring Composite Resource Summary Table reports Describes how to configure CRST reports. Before you begin You need to deploy the CRST as a drill down from a leaf group only. The CRST can drill down into a multi-resource time series report. To configure CRSTs. 1. In a CRST reporter (for example PVRsCRST), expand resourceplanningtable. 2. Expand TableMediator. 3. Expand formulan (for example, formula01) you want to associate with a relation. 4. Double-click relations to access the Property Selection window. 5. Select the name of the relation and click Sae. 6. Expand relationpropertyn (for example, relationproperty01). Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

196 7. Double-click dispresourcename to access the text box if you do not want to retain the default alue true. Retaining the alue true causes a column to be inserted in the CRST table with the resource name associated with each relationproperty selected. The additional column displays in the CRST table before the property columns requested for the propertyrelation. 8. Double-click properties to access the Property Selection window. 9. Select the name of the property. To select multiple properties, press Ctrl to select non-consecutie properties or Shift to select consecutie properties. The selected properties are displayed in the properties field. Multiple properties are separated by a semi-colon (;) and a space. 10. Double-click relations to access the Property Selection window. 11. Select the name of the relation and press Enter. Configuring trending and forecasting reports You can configure two reports to display trending and forecasting information. The first is a summary leel report called the Resource Planning Table (RPT) report and the second is the Trending and Forecasting Time Series report. Before you begin You can either drill down to the Trending and Forecasting Time Series report from the RPT or deploy it as a standalone report. You must decide whether you want to use properties to determine the upgrade condition. If so, you need to define the following two properties: base property The property upon which you want the upgrade condition based, for example, ifspeed. multiplier property The property that contains a alue, most often a percentage, that is multiplied with the base property to obtain the upgrade condition. Note: These properties need to be created and associated with the resources upon which you plan to report. See the DataMart documentation for information about defining properties. After you define these properties, you need to edit the BaseProperty and MultiplierProperty reporter parameters for both the RPT and the TFTS. Configuring the Resource Planning Table The Resource Planning Table (RPT) is a summary report that displays a list of resources along with the upgrade condition, forecast date, and trend direction for each resource. The forecast dates can include dates in the future or dates from the recent past. The dates from the past can show you if a trend for a resource has already exceeded the upgrade condition. Before you begin Configure the RPT to drill down to a trending and forecasting time series. You must configure the time series to receie the RPT metric, stat, trend period alues, and upgrade condition alues passed as parameters in the URL. 186 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

197 To configure RPTs. 1. In an RPT reporter (for example PVLsRatio_ResourcePlanningTable), expand resourceplanningtable. 2. Expand drilldown. 3. Double-click a reporter to select Trending and Forecasting timeseries as the drill-down report. 4. Expand metric. 5. Double-click displaypreious to access the list of alues, and then select true to enable the display of the metric/resource alues for the preious report period in a separate column in the report. For example, the user looking at the report for the current day can also reiew the preious column, which displays the alues from the day before. Retain the default alue false, if you do not want to display the column. 6. Expand upgradecondition. 7. Type the alues you want to display as labels in the RPT. 8. Expand resourceplanningtablemediator. 9. Double-click metric to select the metric you want to report on. Only one metric can be specified. 10. Double-click stat to select the statistic you want to report on. Only one statistic can be specified. You cannot use the following statistics: mintime maxtime agratio sumratio percentilell sumofag 11. Expand ForecastDate. 12. Double-click HistoricalTrendViewLimit to access the text box. You can specify the number of dates from the recent past to consider when displaying resources whose trends hae already exceeded the upgrade condition. For example, if you set the HistoricalTrendViewLimit alue to 2 and generate a monthly report for June 2009, the RPT displays resources that hae a forecast date of April 2009 and forward. 13. Type an integer to indicate the number of dates. Type 0 if you do not want to include any resources with a forecast date in the past. 14. Double-click TrendingPeriodSettings to open the Trending Period Settings window. 15. Click the Trending/Forecast settings tab to access the trending and forecast options for each report type. 16. Type alues for both trending and forecasting for each report period or retain the defaults. 17. If you want to use the non-continuous trending mode for daily and monthly reports, click the non continuous check box under Mode. Otherwise the continuous trending mode is used. Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 187

198 18. If you select non-continuous mode for daily and monthly reports, click the Non Continuous Options tab for additional options. Choose the type of non-continuous pattern you want to use for the daily and monthly reports. What to do next Specify the upgrade condition. Related tasks Specifying the upgrade condition on page 190 Configuring Trending and Forecasting Time Series reports You can deploy a Trending and Forecasting Time Series (TFTS) report as a drill-down from a Resource Planning Table (RPT) report or as a standalone report. Before you begin If you want to deploy the TFTS report as a drill-down report, you need to configure the reporter to obtain the metric, statistic, upgrade condition, and trend period settings from the RPT as URL parameters. If you want to deploy the time series as a standalone report, you need to set specific alues for metric, stat, upgrade condition, and trend period settings. To create a TFTS: 1. In a Resource Time Series style sheet (for example PVLs1ChartDrilldown), expand Chart1Mediator. 2. Expand Trending. 3. Double-click display to access the list of alues. 4. Select Trend & Forecast. Configuring the Trending and Forecasting Time Series as a drill-down report Describes how to configure the Trending and Forecasting Time Series (TFTS) report as a drill-down report. To configure the TFTS as a drill-down report: 1. Double-click the metricfromurl parameter. 2. Type $URL:METRIC and press Enter. 3. Double-click the statfromurl parameter. 4. Type $URL:STAT and press Enter. 5. Expand Trending. 6. Double-click the TrendingPeriodFromUrl parameter. 7. Enter $URL:TRENDPERIOD and press Enter. 8. Expand UpgradeCondition. 188 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

199 9. Double-click the ucfromurl parameter. 10. Type $URL:UC and press Enter. Configuring the Trending and Forecasting Time Series as a standalone report Describes how to configure the Trending and Forecasting Time Series as a standalone report. To configure the TFTS as a standalone report. 1. Double-click metric to select the metric on which you want to report. Choose only one metric. 2. Double-click stat to select the statistic on which you want to report. Select only one statistic. You cannot use the following statistics: mintime maxtime agratio sumratio percentilell sumofag 3. Expand Trending. 4. Double-click TrendingPeriodSettings to open the Trending Period Settings window. 5. Click the Trending/Forecast settings tab to access the trending and forecast options for each report type. 6. Type alues for both trending and forecasting for each report period or retain the defaults. 7. If you want to use the non-continuous trending mode for daily and monthly reports, click the non continuous check box under Mode. Otherwise the continuous trending mode is used. 8. If you select non-continuous mode for daily and monthly reports, click the Non Continuous Options tab for additional options. 9. Select the type of non-continuous pattern that you want to use for the daily and monthly reports. What to do next Specify the upgrade condition. Related tasks Specifying the upgrade condition on page 190 Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 189

200 Specifying the upgrade condition The upgrade condition is determined by the multiplication of base and multiplier. You can either use properties for base and multiplier, use a property for base which is then multiplied by the alue 1 (100%,) or use the default which is then multiplied by 1 (100%). Before you begin Always enter a numeric alue in the default parameter. This alue represents what to use as an upgrade condition if properties are not defined. To specify the upgrade condition. 1. Expand UpgradeCondition. 2. Double-click BaseProperty to open the Property Selection window if you want to use a base property. 3. Select the property you want to use for base. 4. Double-click default to access the text box to specify the default upgrade condition alue you want to use. This alue is used if you do not define a base property or the base property does not exist for the resource. 5. Type a numeric alue. 6. Double-click MultiplierProperty to open the Property Selection window if you want to use a multiplier property. Or, you can leae this field blank to automatically set the multiplier alue to 1 (100%). Related tasks Configuring the Resource Planning Table on page 186 Configuring the Trending and Forecasting Time Series as a standalone report on page 189 The RPT report algorithm The algorithm used in RPT reports is explained in the following sections. Computing slope and intercept alue The algorithm used to determine the predicted upgrade date for the Resource Planning Table (RPT) report is based upon the alues produced by the Oracle linear regression functions REGR_SLOPE and REGR_INTERCEPT. Slope and intercept alues are computed using the dataset of metric/statistic alues oer the configured trending period: REGR_SLOPE(metric/statistic_alue, date) AS slope REGR_INTERCEPT((metric/statistic_alue, date) AS intercept Trending periods: Slope and intercept alues are computed based upon the specified number of trending periods. 190 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

201 The length of the periods used in the trending calculation corresponds to the report period of the RPT report for example, a monthly RPT report uses monthly periods in the trend calculation. Trending periods can be continuous or non-continuous. Continuous trending mode With continuous trending periods, the trend calculation is performed using data from the preious N periods, including the period reported upon by the RPT report. The number of periods is specified in the report configuration window. Non-Continuous trending mode With non-continuous trending periods, the periods used in the trend calculation are not contiguous. For example, a daily, non-continuous RPT report run for August 10, 2006 (a Thursday) may use an aggregate of alues calculated on each Thursday from July 6, 2006 through August 10, Non-continuous trending periods can be applied only to daily and monthly RPT reports. Period options for non-continuous trending Mode For daily RPT reports, the trending periods may correspond to: Day of the week for example, the last N Thursdays Day of the month for example, the 10th of the last N months End of the month for example, the end of the month for the last N months Non-continuous months used in the trend calculation may correspond to: Month of the quarter for example, the second month of the last N quarters Month of the year for example, August of the last N years Computing the upgrade condition In addition to the slope and intercept alues, the upgrade condition is necessary to determine the predicted upgrade date. Configuration of the upgrade condition may be based upon subelement-specific property alues. The upgrade condition is computed by multiplying BaseProperty and MultiplierProperty. If BaseProperty is not configured, the specified default alue will be used as the upgrade condition. Determining the upgrade date After the slope, intercept and upgrade condition alues are computed, the predicted upgrade date can now be determined. The calculation is as follows, using the Oracle FLOOR() and CASE() functions: Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 191

202 Matrix Table reports FLOOR((CASE WHEN Slope = 0 THEN NULL ELSE (((upgradecondition) - intercept) / slope) END) ) AS upgradedate The predicted upgrade date may be in the past or the future. Displaying the upgrade date After the predicted upgrade date is calculated, the decision to display the predicted upgrade date in the RPT report depends on whether the date falls within a particular date range, called the forecasting date range. If the predicted upgrade date occurs within the forecasting date range, the date is displayed in the RPT report. Specifying the forecasting date range The date range for determining whether to display the predicted upgrade date is configurable. This lets you exclude from the RPT subelements with predicted upgrade dates occurring too far in the past or future. Such results may be of little interest and may distract from the subelements with more near-term upgrade dates. The forecasting date range is specified through the following settings: Forecast period Determines the upper boundary (a future date) of the forecasting date range. Any subelements with a predicted upgrade date occurring after this boundary date will not be shown in the RPT report. HistoricalTrendViewLimit Determines the lower boundary (a historical date) of the forecasting date range. Any subelements with a predicted upgrade date occurring prior to this boundary date will not be shown in the RPT report. The continuous or non-continuous period settings that determine the trending periods also determine the forecasting date range. You can configure two report types to display matrix information. Model 1 A path and its opposite path are modeled by using two resources, one resource per direction. Model 2 A path and its opposite path are modeled by using one resource and two metrics, one metric per direction. 192 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

203 Configuring Matrix Table reports: Model 1 In model 1, a path and its opposite path are modeled by using two resources, one resource per direction. To configure Matrix Table reports by using Model 1: 1. In a Matrix reporter (for example PVRsMatrix), expand MatrixMediator. 2. Expand formula Double-click metric to select the metric that you want to report on. Only one metric can be specified. 4. Double-click Source/Dest and select sourceanddestination. 5. Double-click stat to select the statistic that you want to report. Only one statistic can be specified. 6. Expand threshold. 7. Double-click criticalleelproperty, and then select the property to use as the critical leel for the threshold applied to the metric alues for formula01 and click OK. 8. Double-click resourcefilters and specify the resource filter condition if needed. Select a property to filter on. For example, in Property Condition1, select an operator and set a alue (for instance, property ClassOfserice equal to Best Effort. 9. Expand Source/Dest. 10. Double-click destinationproperty, and then select the property that represents the destination endpoint of the resources and click OK. 11. Double-click destinationsource, and then select the property that represents the source endpoint of the resources and click OK. 12. Expand MatrixTable. 13. Double-click displaylegend, and then select true if you want to display the legend in the report. What to do next To enable drill downs. 1. Expand drilldown. 2. Double-click fromcells, select a reporter (typically a time series reporter) and click OK. 3. Double-click fromcolumnlabels, select a reporter (typically an RST reporter) and click OK. 4. Double-click fromrowlabels, select a reporter (typically an RST reporter) and click OK. It can be the same reporter selected for fromcolumnlabels. Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 193

204 Configuring Matrix Table reports: Model 2 In model 2, a path and its opposite path are modeled by using one resource and two metrics, one metric per direction. To configure Matrix Table reports by using Model 2: 1. In a Matrix reporter (for example, PVRsMatrix), expand MatrixMediator. 2. Expand formula Double-click metric to select the metric on which you want to report. Only one metric can be specified. 4. Double-click Source/Dest, and then select sourceonly. 5. Double-click stat to select the statistic on which you want to report. Only one statistic can be specified. 6. Expand threshold. 7. Double-click criticalleelproperty, select the property to use as the critical leel for the threshold applied to the metric alues for formula01, and then click OK. 8. Expand formula Double-click metric to select the metric on which you want to report. Only one metric can be specified. 10. Double-click Source/Dest and select destinationonly. 11. Repeat the steps 5 through Double-click criticalleelproperty, select the property to use as the critical leel for the threshold applied to the metric alues for formula02, and then click OK. 13. Double-click resourcefilters and specify the resource filter condition if needed. Select a property to filter on. For example, in Property Condition1, select an operator and set a alue (such as, property ClassOfserice equal to Best Effort). 14. Expand Source/Destt. 15. Double-click destinationproperty, select the property that represents the destination endpoint of the resources and click OK. 16. Double-click destinationsource, select the property that represents the source endpoint of the resources and click OK. 17. Expand MatrixTable. 18. Double-click displaylegend and select true if you want to display the legend in the report. What to do next To enable drill downs. 1. Expand drilldown. 2. Double-click fromcells, select a reporter (typically a time series reporter) and click OK. 3. Double-click fromcolumnlabels, select a reporter (typically an RST reporter) and click OK. 194 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

205 4. Double-click fromrowlabels, select a reporter (typically an RST reporter) and click OK. It can be the same reporter selected for fromcolumnlabels. Adding trendlines to time series Real-time charts You can add a trendline to a new or existing time series to show the trend of the data during a particular report period. To add trendline to a resource time series: 1. In the resource time series style sheet (for example, PVLs1ChartDrilldown), expand Chart1Mediator. 2. Double-click trendinginformation to see the list of options. 3. Select Trend line to add a trendline to the time series. Describes how to edit real-time chart parameters to create real-time charts You can edit real-time chart parameters to create either of the following types of real-time charts: static (on-demand) chart conersion to real-time standalone You can add real-time chart capability to an existing chart reporter by adding a specific page control to the style sheet for the reporter. Editing real-time parameters The basic set of parameters is the same for both a real-time chart you link to from the on-demand original or for a standalone real-time chart. Before you begin Note: A real-time ersion of on-demand chart inherits the chart style of the on-demand chart. A standalone real-time chart has its own chart style that you can set by editing the chartstyle parameter. Note: The user can change the data presentation of real-time charts by choosing a different data presentation format from a menu. To edit real-time parameters. 1. Expand realtimeparameters. 2. Edit the following parameters: Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 195

206 Option pollingrate(seconds) realtimesupportfornoc realtimesupportforpsla realtimesupportforsla realtimeyaxisdynamic SLAPollingRateMin(seconds) timeout(minutes) Description Rate of data polling and the refresh rate of the chart in seconds. The user can modify the polling rate from a menu. Note: For security reasons, the maximum polling period allowed is 10 minutes (600 seconds). Double-click pollingrate(seconds) to access the text box. Type the number of seconds (minimum of 1) you want to use for the polling rate. Press Enter. Limit the access to real-time reports based on user profile. Double-click the profile name to access the list of alues. Select true if you want users with that profile to access the real-time report. Select false if you do not want users with that profile to access the real-time report. Specify whether the y-axis is set automatically or according to the y-axis definition in chartstyle. Double-click the profile name to access the list of alues. Select true to hae Proiso set the y-axis boundary automatically. Select false to set the y-axis according to the definition of the y-axis in chartstyle. The minimum polling rate for the SLA user in seconds. Double-click SLAPollingRateMin(seconds) to access the text box. Enter the number of seconds you want to set for the polling rate. Press Enter. Set the timeout to determine the length of time the real-time report is actie. A graphical deice on the report display lets the user restart the report, which will timeout again after the set amount of time in minutes. Double-click timeout(minutes) to access the text box. Type the number of minutes you want to real-time report to be actie before timing out. Press Enter. 196 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

207 Option windowtimerange(minutes) Description Number of minutes displayed (x-axis scale) by the real-time chart. The user can to modify the window time range by accessing a menu. Double-click windowtimerange(minutes) to access the text box. Type the number of minutes (minimum of 1) you want to display along the x-axis of the real-time chart. Press Enter. What to do next Select one of the following to complete the real-time chart: Enable the real-time chart support and edit label parameters if creating a real-time chart to link to from an on-demand chart. See Enabling Access from Static Chart. Select a chart style, the metrics to report on, and a chart title for the standalone real-time chart. See Completing Stand-Alone Real-Time Chart. Enabling real-time chart access from a static chart Describes how to enable real-time chart access from the static chart. To enable real-time chart access from the static chart: 1. Double-click realtimesupport to access the list of alues. 2. Select false if you do not want to enable access to the real-time chart from the static chart. Note: If the static chart displays thresholds, the real-time chart also displays those same thresholds and maintains the same color and style. The real-time chart does not reflect any change to the threshold alues, it only displays the latest alues known in the system when the real-time chart becomes actie. Adding link to static chart Describes how to add a link to a static chart To add a link to a static chart: 1. Expand realtimelabel. 2. Edit the following parameters: Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 197

208 Option gotonewbrowserwindow gotoondemandreporttext gotorealtimereporttext Description Display the real-time report on the portal (replacing an on-demand report) or in a new browser window from which you can print. Double-click gotonewbrowserwindow to access the list of alues. Select true if you want the real-time chart to display in a new browser window. Select false if you want the real-time chart to display in the currently open browser window. Add text to the real-time chart as a link back to originating on-demand chart. Double-click gotoondemandreporttext to access the text box. Type the text you want to display on the real-time chart as the link back to the originating on-demand chart. Press Enter. Add text that to the on-demand report as the link to the real-time chart. Double-click gotorealtimereporttext to access the text box. Type the text you want to display on the on-demand chart as the link to the real-time chart. Press Enter. Completing a standalone real-time chart Describes how to complete a standalone real-time chart. Before you begin The parameters for a standalone real-time chart are: pollingrate(seconds) realtimesupportfornoc realtimesupportforsla realtimesupportforpsla SLApollingRateMin(seconds) timeout(minutes) windowtimerange(minutes) To create a standalone real-time chart: 1. Expand RealtimeChart. 2. Double-click chartstyle to access the Select Style window, and then select the style. While iewing the chart, users can change the data presentation from a menu. 198 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

209 The user can choose to present data in plot, scattered plot, bar, or area format. See Changing the Data Presentation, Polling Rate, and Time Range. 3. Click Sae. The style name displays in the chartstyle field. 4. Double-click metrics to access the Metrics window. 5. Select the metrics you want to include in the real-time chart. 6. Double-click Title to access the text box. 7. Type text for a label or use one or more ariables. If combining ariables, include spaces between ariable names. 8. Press Enter. The text or ariables you entered display in the text field. Multi-Resource Time Series charts Multi-resource time series charts display data for multiple resources and for multiple periods. You can designate the reporting period, as well as an offset from the reporting period currently selected for a report. (The offset lets you create multiple charts for the same metric oer different reporting periods). You can also compare charts with the same reporting period but different times. For example, you can display data for the last three consecutie days in three indiidual charts, or display the current day, week, and month for a specific set of resources in one chart. A multi-resource time series chart supports up to 99 resources. Howeer, for readability consider using a much lower number of resources in these charts, typically no more than fie. If you do specify a group that contains more than 99 resources, you must specify family and property filter criteria that restrict the number of resources to be considered by the MRTS chart to no more than 99. If you do not, an MRTS query selects 99 of the resources in the group that match the criteria and ignores and the remaining resources. This can cause resources you expect to display in an MRTS chart to be missing, not because metric data does not exist for these resources, but because too many resources matched the filter criteria that was specified. Note: Consider deploying the multi-resource time series as a drill down from a GST, rather than from an RST. Limitations on multi-resource reports Limitations on multi-resource reports are as follows: Threshold lines are not shown for charts containing data for a single resource. Property lines are shown only for charts containing data for a single resource. Trending is not supported for multi-resource charts. Busy hour is not supported for multi-resource charts. Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 199

210 Multi-resource time series and the resource list Select the resources for a multi-resource time series report from the Resource List. The Resource List is ordered alphabetically according to the name of the resource (alias, label, and customer label.) You then indicate which resources (maximum of 100) from this list you want to display in the multi-resource chart once the report is generated. Because you cannot access the Resource List to reiew it in order to select the resources on which you want to report, familiarize yourself with the grouping structure. Knowing which resources belong to a group helps you to select resources from the list. If you are not able to familiarize yourself with the grouping structure, you can first select all resources from the list for the chart, reiew the results, and modify your selections until you hae the resources you want. Note: If no resources in the Resource List correspond to the family, the property constraints, and the selected resource alues, no data is displayed in the resulting multi-resource time series. You obtain the Resource List from one of the following sources: Technology family: those resources that belong to the selected family. Optional property constraints can be configured and applied as filters to this list. Composite Subelement (CSE). Multi-resource charts with a single resource You can generate a multi-resource chart that contains a single resource, if the underlying Resource List only contains one resource. The multi-resource time series with a single resource behaes the same as the standard single resource time series. Threshold and property lines are displayed. If the resource comes from a URL, the legend contains the metric name rather than the resource name. Accessing the multi-resource options Describes how to access the multi-resource options. To access the multi-resource options: 1. In a resource time series style sheet (for example PVLs1ChartDrilldown), expand Chart1Mediator. 2. Double-click MultiResources. The Multi-Resource Settings window opens. 3. In the Multi-Resource Settings window, enable filtering by family or property, and then enable filtering by composite subelement (CSE). Note: If you do not enable filtering support, you cannot edit the remaining fields. 200 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

211 Filtering by family or property You can generate a Resource List by indicating the family as the source and optional property constraints as additional filters or you can choose to filter only on properties without specifying a family. To filter by family, follow these steps: 1. Select the Specify Filter check box. 2. Optional: Click the down arrow for the Family field. Important: You can choose to filter only on properties and do not hae to specify a family. A menu displays of all known families. 3. Select a family. The family name displays in the Family field. Note: The family criteria can be left empty, which allows any subelement of the group whateer its family to match the filter. You can apply up to three optional property conditions to the resource list for filtering purposes. You enter alues for the two operands and logical operator for each of the conditions that you want to apply. If you define more than one condition, for example Condition 1 and Condition 2, a logical "AND" exists so Condition 1 AND Condition 2 is applied as one filter. For example, for a multi-property filter of ifspeed<10000 AND type=2233_if: Condition 1: first operand is the property ifspeed (string), the operator is less than, and the second operand is the string alue Condition 2: first operand is property type (string), the operator is equal to, and the second operand is the property 2233_IF (string). The Resource List only contains resources for which the property is defined and whose conditional alue for the property meets the comparatie criteria entered here. If you do not want to define property conditions, go to Selecting Resources. Both numeric and string comparisons are supported. The operand type, numeric, or string, is indicated in parentheses after the name. If you choose an operand with the type numeric, numeric operations occur. If you choose an operand with the type string, string comparisons occur. Note: When using two properties as the two operands, the properties must be the same type. 4. Click the down arrow for the first field under Condition 1 to access the list of properties. (The list of properties associated with a resource is determined as of the end of the selected report period). 5. Select the property you want to add it to the field. 6. Click the down arrow for the second field under Condition 1 to access the list of operators. 7. Select the operator name. The name displays in the field. You can also use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard if making string comparisons. For example, you can Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 201

212 enter *Boston* to find all resources with a property alue containing Boston. You can also use the special characters in this table when associated with an escape character (\): Special Character Interpretation \ Escape character. The next characters are interpreted as literal. \%% literal percent (%) \@ literal at sign (@) \* literal asterisk (*) \\ literal backslash (\) Note: You cannot use the percentage sign (%) as an operand. You need to use the literal % as preiously described. If you need two literal % signs in a row, you enter the following sequence: \%%\%%. 8. Select a second operand against which you want to compare the property you entered for the first operand. You can choose a second property from the list that must be the same type (numeric or string) as the first property. Or you can enter text to be used for the comparison. The text is considered the same type as the property type used in the first operand. 9. Optional: You can rank and further filter the records returned by selecting the Filter by Rank check box and configuring the options. Select the check box to filter the records as TopN or BottomN. Type the number of records returned. The default is 10. Select a statistic type to sort on. Note: Whether or not Filter By Rank is enabled, the report can be deployed both at a leaf and a non-leaf group. 10. Click OK to sae your filtering criteria. Filtering by composite subelement (CSEs) A composite subelement (CSE) is identical to a basic subelement (SE), with one exception: the CSE has additional fields called References. The References are links to other subelements. CSEs enable a more powerful representation capability for network objects. To filter by CSE, 1. Select the Specify Filter check box. 2. Select the Filter by Relation check box. 3. Click Select to select a group of CSEs. 4. Optional: Select the Include CSE metrics check box to include CSE metrics in the filtering. 5. Optional: You can rank and further filter the records returned by selecting the Filter by Rank check box and configuring the options. Select the check box to filter the records as TopN or BottomN. Type the number of records returned. The default is 10. Select a statistic type to sort on. 202 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

213 Note: Whether or not Filter By Rank is selected, the report can be deployed both at a leaf and a non-leaf group. 6. Click OK to sae your filtering criteria. Selecting resources for multi-resource time series After you indicate the source of your Resource List, you must add optional property constraints if applicable. Additionally, you must indicate which resources from the list you want to include in the report. Before you begin You cannot access the Resource List to reiew the contents so ensure that you familiarize yourself with the grouping structure. Alternatiely, select all resources from the list, reiew the results, and modify your selections until you hae only the resources that you want. Note: If you do not indicate which resources to select, no data displays in the time series chart. To select resources from the Resource List. Enter the numbers, separated by commas, that indicate which resources to choose from the Resource List. The number represents the position of the resource on the Resource List. For example, if you wanted the first and third resources from the Resource List, you enter 1,3. If you want the fifth through the 10th resources on the list, you enter 5,6,7,8,9,10. OR Enter an asterisk (*) to choose all resources from the list. (You can then check the resulting time series to see the results and further narrow your selection. Setting the report period and period offset You can set the report period and report period offset for indiidual multi-resource time series charts. The report period offset is the number of periods decremented from the currently selected report period of a chart. To set the report period. 1. Expand ChartNMediator, double-click reportperiod to access the list of alues. 2. Select the report period you want and left-click to select it. If you want to use the report time associated with the mediator, choose default. If you choose one of the other period options, the report time associated with the mediator is changed to reflect the choice you make here. (No matter what is set in the URL.) For example, if you choose week as the report period, the weekly report containing the data associated with the start date in the URL displays. Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 203

214 What to do next To set a report period offset. 1. Expand ChartNMediator, double-click reportperiod to access the text box. 2. Enter the number of report periods you want to decrement from the current report period. If you retain the default alue of zero (0), the currently selected date in the URL is used for report generation. Some examples include: If the current report period is day and the currently selected report date is 09/15/09; entering a period offset of 3 means the daily report for 09/12/09 is generated. If the current report period is week and the currently selected report date is 09/15/09; entering a period offset of 1 means the weekly report for 09/08/09 is generated. Setting sliding daily time series Netcool/Proiso supports sliding daily time series, which allows you to configure an on-demand report in sliding mode and extend the time span to more than one day. Before you begin Sliding daily time series is only supported for daily reports of no more than two days. On the portal, users iewing the report can click Preious Day and Next Day links to see one day before and after the current day, as shown: To configure sliding daily time series: 1. In a resource time series style sheet (for example PVLs1ChartDrilldown), expand Chart1Mediator as shown in the preious figure. 204 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

215 2. Click the reportperiodsliding parameter to enable sliding mode, and then change its setting from default false to true. 3. Click the reportperiodmultiplier to define the extended time span, and then set the time span. The default is one. Additional Multi-Resource Time Series parameters Describes additional information about generating multi-resource time series. Additional information about generating multi-resource time series is as follows: Chart Legend For multi-resource time series charts, the chart legends are in the following format (een if you only select a single resource from the Resource List): <resource name>:<stat>:<granularity> For example, _IF2:ag:H. You can drill down from the legend of detailed MRC charts to see a single resource detailed chart with threshold information. Chart Title You need to enter the title of the chart, no automatic generation of chart title occurs. Real-Time Processing The multi-resource time series supports real-time processing for all resources and metrics, except for the standalone real-time chart option. The stacked area chart style is supported for real-time processing. Chart Styles All chart styles are supported with multi-resource time series charts (except for real-time charts). Howeer, some chart styles, such as the stacked area, rely on the alignment of data points between the data series. In this case, choose an aggregation period that forces the alignment of the data series across all resources for which data is being displayed. This period preents points being missing for some resources or breaks in the lines between points. Support for user-editable properties RST reports can be configured to allow users to edit properties from the portal. To add support for user-editable properties. This functionality was added for the following specific use-cases: To enable customers to change resource names (typically numeric addresses) to something more descriptie through the use of a new customerfacingname property. To enable account managers to set a property to either true or false, so that they can manage the groupings of their customers for the display of resources in RST reports. Only resources marked as true are iewable. Important: While any property can be selected to be user-editable from the portal, it is imperatie that you determine that the property is not oerwritten by Discoery formulas or resmgr command updates. Otherwise, any changes made to the property from the portal are not persistent. Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 205

216 To configure support for these use cases, and also to configure a reporter so that any property can be edited from the portal, see: Adding support for editing resource names Adding support to control grouping on page 207 Adding support to edit any property on page 209 Note: For more information about how to edit a report from the portal, see Working with User-Editable RST Reports. Related concepts User-editable features of RST reports on page 15 User-editable RST reports on page 57 Adding support for editing resource names In RST reports, the resource name is displayed in the first field in the first column of the table. Before you begin Enable this functionality to allow a user to edit resource names. For example, a user can their corporation name instead of the resource name of dhcp138_if: "100 Mbps" "FE2/2". The following precedence algorithm selects the alue of the resource name: 1. If the resource has a defined property associated with it, the defined alue is displayed. 2. If the resource has no property associated with it or the property associated with the resource is not defined, the Label field of the resource, which is typically populated by a Discoery formula, is read. If the Label field is defined, the defined alue is displayed. 3. If the Label field of the resource is not defined, the alue in the Name field of the resource, which is always populated by a Discoery formula is displayed. By default, a special property, customerfacingname is associated with eery resource. This property is initially undefined, so the alue in either the Label or Name field for each resource according to the precedence algorithm is displayed as the resource name. Therefore, if users change the alue of the resource name from the portal, they do so by redefining the alue of the customerfacingname property. The precedence algorithm ensures that this redefined alue is always displayed. To add support for a user-editable customerfacingname property. 1. Ensure that a Discoery formula is not populating the customerlabel property with a alue. Important: In almost all cases, Discoery formulas only populate the Name and Label fields of a resource. Howeer, it is important to ensure that the customerlabel property is not being defined by a Discoery formula. Otherwise, the changes made by the user are oerwritten. 206 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

217 2. Inoke DVNaigator, as explained in Creating a New or Modifying an Existing Reporter. 3. Open the reporter for an existing RST or create an RST reporter based on a supported RST style sheet. 4. Click the statstable->resource->editname parameter. The editname parameter is a Boolean that can be set to either true or false. Itissettofalse by default. 5. To enable editing of the resource names from the portal for the RST report, set the alue of the editname parameter to true. 6. Optional: To proide a title for the resource names column in the RST report, click the label parameter and enter a descriptie string. 7. Click OK. 8. To set the appropriate user priileges with the resmgr command: a. Log in to the DataMart serer. b. Change your working directory to the DataMart bin directory by entering the following command: cd $PVMHOME/bin c. Enter the following command, replacing USER with the name of each user to receie portal property-editing priileges: resmgr -import rusr -colnames "rusr.name ruprp.name ruprp.alue" -line "SSSW\\\USER _ DV_UserUpdateProperty _ true _ " Important: Make sure that the report is accessible for the current period (D, W, M, Q, Y, 14S). Note: If users do not hae access to the current period, they cannot see the Edit link, and cannot edit property alues. For more information about how to configure user-accessibility, see Associating Users with DataView Reports. Adding support to control grouping Account managers need a fast and efficient way to include or exclude a subelement from a group used for customer reporting. Netcool/Proiso proides this support by allowing account managers to edit a customervisible property on the portal. Before you begin The intent is to present a check box on each resource entry in the RST which can be selected (TRUE) or cleared (FALSE) by the account manager, to enable or disable the display of the resource. The alue of a specific property (TRUE or FALSE) is written to the database and used during the execution of grouping rules. To add support so that administrators can control grouping from the portal: 1. Create a new customervisible property by using $PVMHOME/bin/resmgr or the $PVMHOME/bin/pm-> DataMart->Resource Editor. For more information about creating properties, see the Netcool/Proiso Command Line Interface Guide or the Netcool/Proiso DataMart Operations Guide and Resource Editor online help. Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 207

218 2. Set up grouping rules based on the customervisible property being set to TRUE or FALSE by using the $PVMHOME/bin/pm->DataMart->Resource- >Rule Editor. For more information about grouping rules, see the IBM Netcool/Proiso DataMart Operations Guide and the Rule Editor online help. 3. Inoke DVNaigator, as explained in Creating a New or Modifying an Existing Reporter. 4. Open the reporter for an existing RST or create an RST reporter based on a supported RST style sheet. 5. Click statstablemediator->properties parameter. The DataView Property Selector window opens. 6. In the DataView Property Selector, do the following: a. Click Add Properties to access the list of aailable properties. b. Select the customervisible property you created in Step 1 from the list of properties and click OK. The property name displays in the left pane of the DataView Property Selector. c. Select the customervisible property to customize it. d. Optional: In the Column Label text box, change the name of the property to something more descriptie. Note: The Column Leel text box contains the string that displays in the column heading in the report; the actual property name is not changed in the database. e. Select the Update Property Value in Table check box, to make the customervisible property editable on the portal. f. Select Boolean from the Type list. This option creates an editable check box on the report, with which the administrator can select or clear resources for display. The supported data types are as follows: string Any UTF-8 character. boolean String alues of yes and no. If selected, a check box is displayed when in edit mode. decimal Any floating-point number in the range 0<X<1TB integer Any integer in the range of 0<X<1TB g. (Optional but recommended) Select the Allow Creation of the Property check box. This option specifies to create the property if it does not exist and associates it with the resource. This option also actiates the default definition text box. h. (Optional but recommended) In the Default Value text box, set the default alue of the property to false. i. Click OK. 7. Set the appropriate user priileges with the resmgr command: a. Log in to the DataMart serer. b. Change your working directory to the DataMart bin directory by entering the following command: cd $PVMHOME/bin c. Enter the following command, replacing USER with the name of each user you want to grant portal property-editing priileges to: resmgr -import rusr -colnames "rusr.name ruprp.name ruprp.alue" -line "SSSW\\\USER _ DV_UserUpdateProperty _ true _ " 208 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

219 d. Ensure that the report is accessible for the current period (D, W, M, Q, Y, 14S). Note: If users do not hae access to the current period, they cannot see the Edit link, and cannot edit property alues. For more information about how to configure user-accessibility, see Associating Users with DataView Reports. Adding support to edit any property The generic instructions for adding support to edit any property from the portal are essentially the same as the instructions in Adding Support To Control Grouping. Creating a Search report The generic instructions for adding support to edit any property from the portal are essentially the same as the instructions in Adding Support To Control Grouping except the grouping instructions. If you intend to use an existing property rather than create a new one, note the following: While any property can be selected to be user-editable from the portal, it is imperatie that you determine that the property is not oerwritten by Discoery formulas or resmgr command updates. Otherwise, any changes made to the property from the portal are not persistent. You can create a search report that you can assign to users. To create a search report: 1. Ensure that you hae a style sheet that was built with a DataView Visual object (for example, the search style sheet PVLsSearch). Style sheets are proided in Netcool/Proiso technology packs. 2. In DataView Naigator, create a reporter and associate it with the PVLsSearch style sheet (or a custom DataView Visual style sheet). 3. Name and sae the new search table reporter. 4. From the Reporter Configuration window, you can configure the arious supported parameters by clicking a particular parameter and entering or selecting a alue. 5. The searchtable parameter is a special search table parameter. When you double-click the searchtable parameter, the DataView Visual Table Design window opens. 6. In the DataView Visual Table Design window, double-click the Choose Request folder, which opens the Request Selector window. 7. Select DVResourceSearch from the Request Selector menu, and click OK to confirm your choice. The DVResourceSearch properties display in the Aailable Columns pane. Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 209

220 Creating a Diagnostic report 8. Optional: You can add more properties to the Aailable Columns pane by clicking the Add Properties button and selecting properties from the Properties Selection window. 9. Drag properties from the Aailable Columns pane to the Specify Columns pane. These properties become fields to search on in the search table. You can drag columns to change the order or delete a column by right-clicking on the column and selecting Delete. 10. In the Table General Settings pane, you can enable or disable the following search options for the entire search table: a. Sorting If selected, returns alphanumeric sorted search results. Enabled by default. b. Paging If selected, DataView creates more than a single table to display the search results, if the number of rows extends beyond the alue specified in Number of Row. Enabled by default. c. Number of Rows IfPaging is enabled, this option specifies the number of table rows to display on one table. The default is 50. If more rows need to be displayed than are specified, links to other tables are created. If Paging is disabled, only the first 50 table rows of search results are displayed. 11. In the Column Details pane, select each column and configure as follows: a. You can change the column label in the Label window. The attribute name displays in the window, which you can then edit to create more descriptie headings. b. In the Sort area, select the Default Sort Column check box to sort the search results on the selected column, or select the Sort Ascending check box to hae the search results displayed in ascending alphanumeric sorted list. If the check box is clear, the search results are returned in descending order. c. In the Search area, you can select the Enable check box to allow a user to search on the selected column, or enter a search string in the Default Search box to run that search when the search table is opened. If you do not specify a default search string, the table is empty. d. In the Drilldowns area, enable group or resource drill downs by selecting a reporter from the menu. 12. When you hae defined criteria for each selected column, click the OK button to sae your choices and exit the table designer. The search table reporter has now been successfully configured. Create a diagnostic report that an administrator can access from the toolbar. To create a diagnostic report: 1. Ensure that you hae a style sheet that was built with a DataView Visual object (for example, the diagnostic style sheet PVRsDiagnostic). Style sheets are proided in Netcool/Proiso technology packs. 2. In DataView Naigator, create a reporter and associate it with the PVRsDiagnostic style sheet. 210 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

221 3. Name and sae the new diagnostic table reporter. 4. From the Reporter Configuration Window, you can configure the arious supported parameters by clicking a particular parameter and entering or selecting a alue. 5. The ChildrenTable, MetricCount, ParentTable, and ResourceTable parameters are special diagnostic table parameters. For a diagnostic report, configure each table parameter in sequence. When you double-click one of these parameters, the DataView Visual Table Design window opens. 6. In the DataView Visual Table Design window, double-click the Choose Request folder. The Request Selector window opens. 7. From the Request Selector menu, select the request that corresponds to the type of table you are configuring. 8. Click OK to confirm your choice. The resources display in the Aailable Columns pane. 9. Drag resources from the Aailable Columns pane to the Specify Columns pane. These resources become column headings in the diagnostic table. You can drag columns to change the order or delete a column by right-clicking on the column and selecting Delete. 10. In the Column Details area, select each column and configure as follows: a. In the Label dialog box, you can change the column label. The attribute name displays in the dialog box, which you can then edit to create more descriptie headings. b. In the Drilldowns area, enable group or resource drill downs by selecting a reporter from the Reporter menu. 11. When you hae defined criteria for each selected column, click the OK button to sae your choices and exit the table designer. The diagnostic table reporter has now been successfully configured. Appendix A. Configuring specific reports 211

222 212 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

223 Appendix B. DataView style sheets Basic style sheets DataView style sheets define the layout of report objects, including report spacing, text and chart placement. Style sheets are typically deliered in a Netcool/Proiso technology pack, although you or IBM Professional Serices can also create or modify style sheets. The style sheets aailable to you are the style sheets contained in the installed technology packs, plus any customized style sheets that were created. The following table contains a basic subset of supported style sheets. Style Sheet PVLsNChartDrilldown (N is 1 to 6) PVLsRankVariation PVLsBaseline PVLsGroupSummaryTable PVLsRatio_GST PVLsResourceOerThrTable Reporter Generates reports containing N number of detail charts (time series chart) that display data collected on a specified number of metrics and for one or multiple resources. Users drill down to these reports from the higher leel summary reports. The content designer can add a trendline to the resource time series charts by editing the trending reporter parameters. Generates a Rank Variation report that displays the resource whose rank changed the most during the last reporting period. The report compares the rank of the resource in the current reporting period to its ranking in the preious reporting period. A single statistic (min, max, ag, sum, count) is used for the comparison. Generates a Baseline chart that contains current and historical data. The charts let you compare statistics from the current period with the historic behaior of the same resource. You can then identify where current resource behaior differs from the behaior in the past. Generates Group Summary Table (GST) reports. GST reports proide an oeriew of the behaior of seeral groups of resources against up to 10 metrics. They sere as the starting point for drilling down to more specific group report details such as resource summary tables. Generates up to two ratio (pie) charts. Each chart can be configured to show the relationship of a single metric among different groups or a single group among different metrics. A ratio report can contain the following information: Multiple metrics and a single statistic for a single group (Metric ratio) Multiple groups for a single metric and a single statistic (Group ratio) This page can also contain a Group Summary table (GST) that proides an oeriew of the behaior of seeral groups of resources for up to 10 metrics. Generates Resource Oer Threshold Table (RTT) reports that display a list of resources. The resources are sorted so that resources that iolate thresholds by being oer or under the threshold alue are listed first. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

224 Style Sheet PVLsResourceSummaryTable PVLsTopN_6 Reporter Generates Resource Summary Table (RST) reports that lists all resources contained in a group. It can show the resource behaior for up to 20 metrics. In addition, an RST can be configured to show resource properties. The RST seres as the starting point for drilling down to single resource-oriented reports such as Time Series reports. Generates TopN/BottomN reports that list the N highest alues during a specified time range for a specific metric. Drilling down to group- or resource-oriented reports is possible from a TopN/BottomN report. Related tasks Creating or modifying reporters on page 116 Creating or customizing style sheets The form and content of iews and reports are controlled by Netcool/Proiso DataView style sheets that are based on JaaSerer Pages (JSP) technology. If you need to extend the default capability of the Netcool/Proiso Technology packs, DataView style sheets can be edited in any standard JSP editor. Howeer, to help you with this process, IBM proides a toolkit based on Eclipse. You can download the TNPM DataView Page Design Toolkit from the IBM Open Process Automation Library (OPAL) at portal/opal. 214 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

225 Appendix C. Creating a reporter set Reporter sets The Reporter Set Wizard A reporter set contains a group of reporters that together proide information about a specific technology or a endor deice. Using the Reporter Set Wizard, you choose the type of template upon which you want to base the reporter set, then enter information in the series of windows that follow. Before using the Reporter Set Wizard, the DataView Naigator Reporter Set Templates, which are deliered with the Technology Pack distribution, must be installed. If the templates are not installed, the wizard page is blank. The templates delier differently in different Technology Pack distributions. For information about how to install the DataView Naigator Reporter Set Templates, see the IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso Installation Guide and the IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso Technology Pack Release Notes for your Technology Pack distribution. A reporter set contains a group of reporters that proide information about a specific technology or deice. You design a reporter set around the metrics that let you precisely monitor the status, performance, and other operational features of the technology or deice. For example, if you want to generate reports for a Juniper ERX router, the reporter set you create for the router might include: A utilization reporter to proide metrics such as nonolatile storage (NVS) and license utilization. An IP interface reporter to proide metrics such as aerage inbound and outbound traffic in bps. An ATM error reporter to proide metrics on asynchronous transfer errors. You can create a reporter set yourself by following the configuration instructions. But it is faster to hae the Reporter Set Wizard help you through the creation process. The Reporter Set Wizard guides you through the process of creating a reporter set by prompting you for the information needed to construct reporters. For example, the metrics to include, the kinds of statistics to apply to a metric, and the parameters that define the report layout and data presentation. The Reporter Set Wizard also narrows the choices you can make when selecting features, based on the choices you made in preious Reporter Set Wizard pages. For example, the types of reporters you can choose for a reporter set are determined by the template you chose. In many cases, the Reporter Set Wizard presents default alues for reporter characteristics such as titles, labels, statistics, and parameters. You can retain the defaults or modify them to suit your requirements. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

226 Reporter sets and templates While working in the Reporter Set Wizard, you can click the Back button to return to a preious page, change your selections, and click Next to continue. Howeer, once you complete the definition of a reporter set and click Finish, you cannot use the wizard to modify the reporter set. The Reporter Set Wizard is included with the installation of one or more Netcool/Proiso Technology Packs. Reporters are hierarchical that is, when you are iewing a report generated by a higher-leel reporter, you can click information in the report to see more detailed information in a report below it. When you select a template, you can only choose the reporter types supported by the selected template. This table shows the templates you can select through the Reporter Set Wizard. Table 1. Templates Template Reporter Sets Description AP Health Dashboard, GST, RST, RST_DR, RTT, DC Resource distribution and time series metrics. Includes metrics that are aboe and below thresholds. For example, errors, aailability, buffer utilization, CPU usage, latency, and jitter. AP Traffic Dashboard, GST, RST, DC Highest-alue and time series metrics. Does not include threshold comparisons. This table shows the reporters you can select through the Reporter Set Wizard. Short Name Full Name Full Name Description Dashboard High-leel oeriew of all information in the reporters below it. GST Group Summary Table Summary of information for multiple resource groups, based on up to six metrics. RST Resource Summary Table Summary of information for a single resource group, based on up to 20 metrics. RST_DR Resource Summary Table Distribution Range Summary of information for a single resource group, filtered by a specific range. This reporter set does not support charts. RTT Resource Threshold Table Burst, period, baseline, and risk threshold iolations. 216 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

227 Short Name Full Name Full Name Description DC Detailed Chart Detailed information primarily consisting of resource time series charts and real-time links. AP health reports flowchart The following flowchart shows the drill-down hierarchy of reports based on the AP Health template. The flowchart includes the kinds of tables and charts associated with each report type. When you create a reporter set with the Reporter Set Wizard, the wizard selects tables, charts, and drill-down reporters based on the hierarchy shown in this flowchart: AP traffic reports flowchart The following flowchart shows the drill-down hierarchy of reports based on the AP Traffic template. The flowchart includes the kinds of tables and charts associated with each report type. When you create a reporter set with the Reporter Set Wizard, the wizard selects tables, charts, and drill-down reporters based on the hierarchy shown in this flowchart: Appendix C. Creating a reporter set 217

228 Accessing the reporter set wizard The Reporter Set Wizard is accessed from the File menu in DataView Naigator. Before you begin Before running the Reporter Set wizard: Load the DataView Naigator Reporter Set templates into the database. If the templates are not installed, the wizard page is blank. For information about how to install the templates, see theibm Tioli Netcool/Proiso Installation Guide and the IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso Technology Pack Release Notes for your technology pack distribution. Create the formulas for the technology pack. For information about creating formulas, see the IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso DataMart Configuration Guide. Hae read/write access for DataView Naigator. To create a user who can create DataView Naigator Objects, create a user with a password (administrator/admin). To access the Reporter Set Wizard: 1. Click Define Resource Views. The DataView Naigator window opens. 2. In DataView Naigator, select the Applications folder or a folder beneath it for a location for the new reporter set. You cannot create a reporter set in a folder that already contains a reporter set. The folders beneath Applications can contain a reporter set or one or more subfolders, each of which can contain a 218 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

229 reporter set. For example, an AP Juniper ERX folder might contain subfolders such as Utilization, IP Interface, and ATM Errors, with each subfolder containing a separate reporter set. 3. From the File menu, select New Folder. 4. Enter a name for the folder. 5. Sae the folder. 6. Select the new folder. 7. From the File menu, select Reporter Set Wizard. The first page of the Reporter Set Wizard opens. Creating a reporter set by using the wizard Configure the reporter set by setting the appropriate options on each page of the wizard. Choosing a template A template determines the composition of the reporter set. It specifies the style sheets to use and the naigation among the reporters. It also defines default alues for some reporter parameters and determines the parameters that are accessible through the Reporter Set Wizard. To chose a reporter set template: 1. In DataView Naigator, select File Reporter Set Wizard. 2. The Reporter Set Wizard page for choosing the reporter set template opens, as shown: 3. Select a reporter set template from the list: Appendix C. Creating a reporter set 219

230 Option GST Summary Reporter Set GST Distribution Reporter Set GST Ratio Reporter Set Description Contains the standard reporters: GST, RST, RTT, and DC. Reporter sets GST and RST contain distribution charts. Reporter sets GST and RST contain ratio charts. Naming the reporter set The reporter set name distinguishes a reporter set (and all the reporters it contains) from the other reporter sets in the database. To name the reporter set: 1. In the Reporter Set Wizard page for specifying the name of the reporter set, type a name in the Reporter set name field. 2. Click Next. 220 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

231 Selecting reporter set metrics The reports that are generated from this reporter set consists of the data for the metrics you select on this page. The metrics you select determine the information you need to choose in the other Reporter Set Wizard pages. For example, the number of metrics you select determine the number of pages you see for associating statistics with the metrics. To select metrics for the reporter set: 1. In the left pane of the metric selection window, expand Metrics: 2. Browse to the metrics you want to add. 3. To include a metric in reports, moe it to the right pane by selecting the metric name and clicking the right arrow button. Metrics in the right pane are included in reports. 4. Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 for each additional metric. In the following figure, four metrics hae been selected for inclusion: Appendix C. Creating a reporter set 221

232 5. When finished adding metrics, click Next. Labeling the metrics For each metric that you selected on the preious wizard page, you can specify a label that identifies the metric in reports. Before you begin You can enter labels for all, some, or none of the metrics. If you do not specify a label for a metric, the metric name as it is displayed on the preious wizard page is used in reports. The order that the formulas are listed on the page corresponds directly to where they display in all wizard templates. Since it is important to remember the order as you work through the subsequent pages, write down the number of each formula. For example, your notes could read 1. Phase-1 Authentication Failures. 2. Phase 1-Hash Validation Failures. To label the metrics: 1. In the Reporter Set Wizard page for entering metric labels, type a label in the text box beneath each metric. 222 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

233 2. When finished, click Next. Selecting chart styles Selecting chart styles requires some planning, there are many chart styles to choose from. Before you begin The chart styles you choose for the technology pack depend on a number of factors: Each metric corresponds to a chartstyle number. Based on the importance of the metric, you need to choose the appropriate chart style. Determine the actual chart style. Determine the number of color ranges you want to display. If you want three or less colors, for example, choose a chart style that has green as its third color. Change colors where appropriate. If the metric indicates a bad state, for example, you might change the color to red. Note: The default alues that display depend on the template chosen for the reporter set. No alues display if the template does not contain default alues. The name you see aboe each text box is the name of a chart in the template you preiously selected. The default alues that display in the text boxes depend on the template chosen for the reporter set. No alues display if the template does not contain default alues. A separate wizard page displays for each of the reporter types that you can define charts for: GST, RST, and DC. Appendix C. Creating a reporter set 223

234 The procedure for assigning chart styles is the same for all reporter types. To select a chart style: 1. In the first Reporter Set Wizard page for selecting chart styles, change a chart style assignment as follows: To select a new chart style, click Select to the right of the chart style to change. In the Select Style window, select the new chart style and click Sae. To copy a chart style, click the radio button next to the chart style to copy from, then click the Copy button to the right of the chart style to change. To remoe a chart style, click Select to the right of the chart style to remoe. In the Select Style window, click Clear. 2. When finished selecting chart styles, click Next. If there is another reporter type that needs chart styles assigned to it, the wizard displays a new page for the reporter type. Repeat Step 1. If you hae defined chart styles for all reporter types, the Reporter Set Wizard page for selecting statistics opens. Selecting statistics Statistics proide spatial aggregation for metrics. Before you begin You must select one or more statistics for each metric. You select statistics for one metric at a time. For example, if you chose six metrics, you choose the statistics for the first metric, click Next, then you choose the statistics for the second metric, click Next, and so on. The name of the metric you are currently defining shows oer the selection boxes. To select statistics for each metric: 1. In the left pane of the Reporter Set Wizard window, click a statistic name to select. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to select multiple statistics. 224 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

235 2. Click the right arrow key to moe the selected statistic to the right pane. 3. The report displays the statistics in the same order as they display in the right pane. Click the up and down arrow keys to reposition the statistics in the right pane. 4. When finished, click Next: If there is another metric that needs statistics assigned to it, the wizard displays a new page for the metric. Repeat steps 1 through 3. If you hae defined statistics for all metrics, the Reporter Set Wizard page for entering statistic labels opens. Labeling statistics For each statistic that you selected on the preious wizard pages, you can specify a label that identifies the statistic in reports. Before you begin You can enter labels for all, some, or none of the statistics. If you do not specify a label for a statistic, the statistic name as it displayed on the preious wizard pages is used in reports. The label you enter for a statistic applies to each use of that statistic within the reporter set. If you want to indiidualize a statistic label in a particular reporter, you need to edit the reporter parameters. To label a statistic: 1. Type a label in the text box beneath each statistic that you want to associate with a label. Appendix C. Creating a reporter set 225

236 2. When finished defining labels, click Next. Entering report parameters Reporter parameters influence the layout of the report as well as define to a large extent (within the boundaries of the style sheet) the type of data that the report displays. Before you begin You define reporter parameters on seeral wizard pages. Depending on the type of template you selected, there can be a page containing default parameters, and pages containing parameters for each of the reporter types (such as GST, RST) associated with the selected template. Default parameters apply to all reporters in a set. Parameters that display on a wizard page for a particular reporter type apply to that reporter type only. To enter alues for reporter parameters: 1. In the Reporter Set Wizard page for entering alues for reporter parameters, the parameters are listed. For example, the following default parameters displayed for the AP Health template: 226 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

237 Enter the alues you want for each parameter (or retain defaults, if any). 2. When finished entering parameter alues, click Next: If there is another reporter that needs parameter alues defined for it, the wizard displays a new page for the reporter. If you hae entered parameter alues for all reporters, the Reporter Set Wizard page for adding reporter descriptions displays. Entering reporter descriptions The reporter descriptions you proide are applied to reports, not to the folder where the reporter set is stored. If you want to add a description for the folder, you must add a comment to the folder. To enter reporter descriptions: 1. In the Reporter Set Wizard page for entering reporter descriptions, type a description for each reporter (or optionally, leae a description blank). Appendix C. Creating a reporter set 227

238 2. When finished, click Next. Listing the reporters The reporter set is now complete and the Reporter Set Wizard displays a list of the reporters in the new reporter set. Before you begin The list can take seeral seconds to display. Once you complete the definition of a reporter set and click Finish, you cannot use the wizard to modify the reporter set. For information about modifying a completed reporter set, see Chapter 6, Configuring reports, on page 115. To reiew the reporter set and exit the wizard: 1. Reiew the list of reports in the reporter set. The following Reporter Set Wizard page shows a list of reporters created for a reporter set based on the AP Health template. 228 IBM Tioli Netcool/Proiso: DataView User and Administrator Guide

239 2. Click Finished to exit the Reporter Set Wizard. What to do next You can now see, and optionally, modify the reporter set in DataView Naigator. Each reporter in the set displays in the folder you created before you ran the Reporter Set Wizard. Appendix C. Creating a reporter set 229

IBM Tivoli Netcool Performance Manager Wireline Component October 2015 Document Revision R2E1. Pack Upgrade Guide IBM

IBM Tivoli Netcool Performance Manager Wireline Component October 2015 Document Revision R2E1. Pack Upgrade Guide IBM IBM Tioli Netcool Performance Manager Wireline Component October 2015 Document Reision R2E1 Pack Upgrade Guide IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in

More information

IBM i Version 7.2. Security Service Tools IBM

IBM i Version 7.2. Security Service Tools IBM IBM i Version 7.2 Security Serice Tools IBM IBM i Version 7.2 Security Serice Tools IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 37. This

More information

xseries Systems Management IBM Diagnostic Data Capture 1.0 Installation and User s Guide

xseries Systems Management IBM Diagnostic Data Capture 1.0 Installation and User s Guide xseries Systems Management IBM Diagnostic Data Capture 1.0 Installation and User s Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix C, Notices,

More information

IBM Tivoli Monitoring: AIX Premium Agent Version User's Guide SA

IBM Tivoli Monitoring: AIX Premium Agent Version User's Guide SA Tioli IBM Tioli Monitoring: AIX Premium Agent Version 6.2.2.1 User's Guide SA23-2237-06 Tioli IBM Tioli Monitoring: AIX Premium Agent Version 6.2.2.1 User's Guide SA23-2237-06 Note Before using this information

More information

Tivoli IBM Tivoli Advanced Catalog Management for z/os

Tivoli IBM Tivoli Advanced Catalog Management for z/os Tioli IBM Tioli Adanced Catalog Management for z/os Version 2.2.0 Monitoring Agent User s Guide SC23-9818-00 Tioli IBM Tioli Adanced Catalog Management for z/os Version 2.2.0 Monitoring Agent User s Guide

More information

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Version 7.1. Installation Guide

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Version 7.1. Installation Guide IBM Tioli Storage Manager for Windows Version 7.1 Installation Guide IBM Tioli Storage Manager for Windows Version 7.1 Installation Guide Note: Before using this information and the product it supports,

More information

IBM Unica Distributed Marketing Version 8 Release 6 May 25, Field Marketer's Guide

IBM Unica Distributed Marketing Version 8 Release 6 May 25, Field Marketer's Guide IBM Unica Distributed Marketing Version 8 Release 6 May 25, 2012 Field Marketer's Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 83. This

More information

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Version Tivoli Monitoring for Tivoli Storage Manager

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Version Tivoli Monitoring for Tivoli Storage Manager IBM Tioli Storage Manager for Windows Version 7.1.0 Tioli Monitoring for Tioli Storage Manager IBM Tioli Storage Manager for Windows Version 7.1.0 Tioli Monitoring for Tioli Storage Manager Note: Before

More information

ImageUltra Builder Version 2.0. User Guide

ImageUltra Builder Version 2.0. User Guide ImageUltra Builder Version 2.0 User Guide ImageUltra Builder Version 2.0 User Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read Appendix A, Notices, on page 153. Fifth

More information

ImageUltra Builder Version 1.1. User Guide

ImageUltra Builder Version 1.1. User Guide ImageUltra Builder Version 1.1 User Guide ImageUltra Builder Version 1.1 User Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read Notices on page 83. First Edition (October

More information

Mass Data Extraction User's Guide

Mass Data Extraction User's Guide Tioli Netcool Performance Manager 1.3 Wireline Component (Netcool/Proiso 5.2) Document Reision R2E2 Mass Data Extraction User's Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read

More information

Tivoli Monitoring: Windows OS Agent

Tivoli Monitoring: Windows OS Agent Tioli Monitoring: Windows OS Agent Version 6.2.2 User s Guide SC32-9445-03 Tioli Monitoring: Windows OS Agent Version 6.2.2 User s Guide SC32-9445-03 Note Before using this information and the product

More information

IBM Director Virtual Machine Manager 1.0 Installation and User s Guide

IBM Director Virtual Machine Manager 1.0 Installation and User s Guide IBM Director 4.20 Virtual Machine Manager 1.0 Installation and User s Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix D, Notices, on page

More information

IBM Tealeaf cximpact Version 9 December 4, Tealeaf Reporting Guide

IBM Tealeaf cximpact Version 9 December 4, Tealeaf Reporting Guide IBM Tealeaf cximpact Version 9 December 4, 2014 Tealeaf Reporting Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 175. This edition applies

More information

IBM Agent Builder Version User's Guide IBM SC

IBM Agent Builder Version User's Guide IBM SC IBM Agent Builder Version 6.3.5 User's Guide IBM SC32-1921-17 IBM Agent Builder Version 6.3.5 User's Guide IBM SC32-1921-17 Note Before you use this information and the product it supports, read the information

More information

IBM Operational Decision Manager Version 8 Release 5. Installation Guide

IBM Operational Decision Manager Version 8 Release 5. Installation Guide IBM Operational Decision Manager Version 8 Release 5 Installation Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 51. This edition applies

More information

Solutions for BSM Version 1.1. Solutions for BSM Guide

Solutions for BSM Version 1.1. Solutions for BSM Guide Solutions for BSM Version 1.1 Solutions for BSM Guide Solutions for BSM Version 1.1 Solutions for BSM Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices.

More information

Monitoring: Windows OS Agent Version Fix Pack 2 (Revised May 2010) User s Guide SC

Monitoring: Windows OS Agent Version Fix Pack 2 (Revised May 2010) User s Guide SC Tioli Monitoring: Windows OS Agent Version 6.2.2 Fix Pack 2 (Reised May 2010) User s Guide SC32-9445-03 Tioli Monitoring: Windows OS Agent Version 6.2.2 Fix Pack 2 (Reised May 2010) User s Guide SC32-9445-03

More information

IBM Campaign Version 9 Release 1 October 25, User's Guide

IBM Campaign Version 9 Release 1 October 25, User's Guide IBM Campaign Version 9 Release 1 October 25, 2013 User's Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 229. This edition applies to ersion

More information

System i and System p. Capacity on Demand

System i and System p. Capacity on Demand System i and System p Capacity on Demand System i and System p Capacity on Demand Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 65 and the IBM

More information

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Version Installation Guide

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Version Installation Guide IBM Tioli Storage Manager for Windows Version 7.1.1 Installation Guide IBM Tioli Storage Manager for Windows Version 7.1.1 Installation Guide Note: Before using this information and the product it supports,

More information

IBM i Version 7.2. Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Web IBM

IBM i Version 7.2. Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Web IBM IBM i Version 7.2 Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Web IBM IBM i Version 7.2 Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Web IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information

More information

IBM Marketing Operations and Campaign Version 9 Release 1.1 November 26, Integration Guide

IBM Marketing Operations and Campaign Version 9 Release 1.1 November 26, Integration Guide IBM Marketing Operations and Campaign Version 9 Release 1.1 Noember 26, 2014 Integration Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 55.

More information

WebSphere Message Broker Monitoring Agent User's Guide

WebSphere Message Broker Monitoring Agent User's Guide IBM Tioli OMEGAMON XE for Messaging on z/os Version 7.1 WebSphere Message Broker Monitoring Agent User's Guide SC23-7954-03 IBM Tioli OMEGAMON XE for Messaging on z/os Version 7.1 WebSphere Message Broker

More information

IBM Tivoli Monitoring for Virtual Environments: Dashboard, Reporting, and Capacity Planning Version 7.1 Fix Pack 1. User s Guide SC

IBM Tivoli Monitoring for Virtual Environments: Dashboard, Reporting, and Capacity Planning Version 7.1 Fix Pack 1. User s Guide SC IBM Tioli Monitoring for Virtual Enironments: Dashboard, Reporting, and Capacity Planning Version 7.1 Fix Pack 1 User s Guide SC14-7493-01 IBM Tioli Monitoring for Virtual Enironments: Dashboard, Reporting,

More information

iseries Experience Reports Configuring Management Central Connections for Firewall Environments

iseries Experience Reports Configuring Management Central Connections for Firewall Environments iseries Experience Reports Configuring Management Central Connections for Firewall Enironments iseries Experience Reports Configuring Management Central Connections for Firewall Enironments Copyright

More information

IBM Tivoli Netcool Performance Manager Wireline Component October 2012 Document Revision R2E1. Pack Installation and Configuration Guide

IBM Tivoli Netcool Performance Manager Wireline Component October 2012 Document Revision R2E1. Pack Installation and Configuration Guide IBM Tioli Netcool Performance Manager Wireline Component October 2012 Document Reision R2E1 Pack Installation and Configuration Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read

More information

License Administrator s Guide

License Administrator s Guide IBM Tioli License Manager License Administrator s Guide Version 1.1.1 GC23-4833-01 Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information under Notices on page 115. Second

More information

Registration Authority Desktop Guide

Registration Authority Desktop Guide IBM SecureWay Trust Authority Registration Authority Desktop Guide Version 3 Release 1.1 SH09-4530-01 IBM SecureWay Trust Authority Registration Authority Desktop Guide Version 3 Release 1.1 SH09-4530-01

More information

IBM Tivoli Enterprise Console. User s Guide. Version 3.9 SC

IBM Tivoli Enterprise Console. User s Guide. Version 3.9 SC IBM Tioli Enterprise Console User s Guide Version 3.9 SC32-1235-00 IBM Tioli Enterprise Console User s Guide Version 3.9 SC32-1235-00 Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read

More information

IBM Security Access Manager for Web Version 7.0. Upgrade Guide SC

IBM Security Access Manager for Web Version 7.0. Upgrade Guide SC IBM Security Access Manager for Web Version 7.0 Upgrade Guide SC23-6503-02 IBM Security Access Manager for Web Version 7.0 Upgrade Guide SC23-6503-02 Note Before using this information and the product

More information

IBM Tivoli Netcool Performance Manager Wireline Component April 2014 Document Revision R2E1. Pack Release Notes

IBM Tivoli Netcool Performance Manager Wireline Component April 2014 Document Revision R2E1. Pack Release Notes IBM Tioli Netcool Manager Wireline Component April 2014 Document Reision R2E1 Pack Release Notes Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page

More information

WebSphere MQ Configuration Agent User's Guide

WebSphere MQ Configuration Agent User's Guide IBM Tioli Composite Application Manager for Applications Version 7.1 WebSphere MQ Configuration Agent User's Guide SC14-7525-00 IBM Tioli Composite Application Manager for Applications Version 7.1 WebSphere

More information

iseries Configuring Management Central Connections for Firewall Environments

iseries Configuring Management Central Connections for Firewall Environments iseries Configuring Management Central Connections for Firewall Enironments iseries Configuring Management Central Connections for Firewall Enironments Copyright International Business Machines Corporation

More information

IBM. Tivoli. Netcool/Proviso. Cisco Class-Based QoS Technology Pack. User Guide. Document Revision R2E2

IBM. Tivoli. Netcool/Proviso. Cisco Class-Based QoS Technology Pack. User Guide. Document Revision R2E2 Tivoli Netcool/Proviso Document Revision R2E2 IBM Cisco Class-Based QoS 2.1.1.0 Technology Pack User Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices

More information

IBM Marketing Operations and Campaign Version 9 Release 0 January 15, Integration Guide

IBM Marketing Operations and Campaign Version 9 Release 0 January 15, Integration Guide IBM Marketing Operations and Campaign Version 9 Release 0 January 15, 2013 Integration Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 51.

More information

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Virtual Environments Version Data Protection for VMware Installation Guide IBM

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Virtual Environments Version Data Protection for VMware Installation Guide IBM IBM Tioli Storage Manager for Virtual Enironments Version 7.1.6 Data Protection for VMware Installation Guide IBM IBM Tioli Storage Manager for Virtual Enironments Version 7.1.6 Data Protection for VMware

More information

IBM Tivoli Service Level Advisor. SLM Reports. Version 2.1 SC

IBM Tivoli Service Level Advisor. SLM Reports. Version 2.1 SC IBM Tioli Serice Leel Adisor SLM Reports Version 2.1 SC32-1248-00 IBM Tioli Serice Leel Adisor SLM Reports Version 2.1 SC32-1248-00 Fourth Edition (September 2004) This edition applies to Version 2.1

More information

IBM Spectrum Control Version User's Guide IBM SC

IBM Spectrum Control Version User's Guide IBM SC IBM Spectrum Control Version 5.2.9 User's Guide IBM SC27-6588-01 Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 359. This edition applies to ersion

More information

Deployment Overview Guide

Deployment Overview Guide IBM Security Priileged Identity Manager Version 1.0 Deployment Oeriew Guide SC27-4382-00 IBM Security Priileged Identity Manager Version 1.0 Deployment Oeriew Guide SC27-4382-00 Note Before using this

More information

Solutions for BSM 1.1 Expanded Operating System Release. Solutions for BSM Guide

Solutions for BSM 1.1 Expanded Operating System Release. Solutions for BSM Guide Solutions for BSM 1.1 Expanded Operating System Release Solutions for BSM Guide Solutions for BSM 1.1 Expanded Operating System Release Solutions for BSM Guide Note Before using this information and the

More information

IBM Network Performance Insight Document Revision R2E2. Network Performance Insight Overview IBM

IBM Network Performance Insight Document Revision R2E2. Network Performance Insight Overview IBM IBM Network Performance Insight 1.2.2 Document Reision R2E2 Network Performance Insight Oeriew IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page

More information

IBM Tivoli OMEGAMON XE for CICS TG on z/os Version User's Guide SC

IBM Tivoli OMEGAMON XE for CICS TG on z/os Version User's Guide SC IBM Tioli OMEGAMON XE for CICS TG on z/os Version 5.1.0 User's Guide SC14-7476-00 IBM Tioli OMEGAMON XE for CICS TG on z/os Version 5.1.0 User's Guide SC14-7476-00 Note Before using this information and

More information

Netcool /Proviso 4.3-U. RFC DSL Application Pack User s Guide. Document Revision R2E1

Netcool /Proviso 4.3-U. RFC DSL Application Pack User s Guide. Document Revision R2E1 Netcool /Proviso 4.3-U RFC DSL Application Pack User s Guide Document Revision R2E1 Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A. IBM may not offer the products,

More information

Road Map for the Typical Installation Option of IBM Tivoli Monitoring Products, Version 5.1.0

Road Map for the Typical Installation Option of IBM Tivoli Monitoring Products, Version 5.1.0 Road Map for the Typical Installation Option of IBM Tioli Monitoring Products, Version 5.1.0 Objectie Who should use the Typical installation method? To use the Typical installation option to deploy an

More information

IBM. RSE for z/os User's Guide. IBM Explorer for z/os. Version 3 Release 1 SC

IBM. RSE for z/os User's Guide. IBM Explorer for z/os. Version 3 Release 1 SC IBM Explorer for z/os IBM RSE for z/os User's Guide Version 3 Release 1 SC27-8433-03 IBM Explorer for z/os IBM RSE for z/os User's Guide Version 3 Release 1 SC27-8433-03 Note Before using this information,

More information

IBM Netcool Operations Insight Version 1 Release 4.1. Integration Guide IBM SC

IBM Netcool Operations Insight Version 1 Release 4.1. Integration Guide IBM SC IBM Netcool Operations Insight Version 1 Release 4.1 Integration Guide IBM SC27-8601-08 Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 403. This

More information

Version 10 Release 0 February 28, IBM Campaign User's Guide IBM

Version 10 Release 0 February 28, IBM Campaign User's Guide IBM Version 10 Release 0 February 28, 2017 IBM Campaign User's Guide IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 241. This edition applies to

More information

IBM Tivoli Composite Application Manager for Microsoft Applications: Microsoft Exchange Server Agent Fix Pack 13.

IBM Tivoli Composite Application Manager for Microsoft Applications: Microsoft Exchange Server Agent Fix Pack 13. IBM Tioli Composite Application Manager for Microsoft Applications: Microsoft Exchange Serer Agent 6.3.1 Fix Pack 13 Reference IBM IBM Tioli Composite Application Manager for Microsoft Applications: Microsoft

More information

IBM Tivoli Monitoring for Business Integration. User s Guide. Version SC

IBM Tivoli Monitoring for Business Integration. User s Guide. Version SC IBM Tioli Monitoring for Business Integration User s Guide Version 5.1.1 SC32-1403-00 IBM Tioli Monitoring for Business Integration User s Guide Version 5.1.1 SC32-1403-00 Note Before using this information

More information

IBM. Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Web. IBM i 7.1

IBM. Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Web. IBM i 7.1 IBM IBM i Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Web 7.1 IBM IBM i Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Web 7.1 Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices,

More information

IBM. Client Configuration Guide. IBM Explorer for z/os. Version 3 Release 1 SC

IBM. Client Configuration Guide. IBM Explorer for z/os. Version 3 Release 1 SC IBM Explorer for z/os IBM Client Configuration Guide Version 3 Release 1 SC27-8435-01 IBM Explorer for z/os IBM Client Configuration Guide Version 3 Release 1 SC27-8435-01 Note Before using this information,

More information

High Availability Guide for Distributed Systems

High Availability Guide for Distributed Systems IBM Tioli Monitoring Version 6.2.3 Fix Pack 1 High Aailability Guide for Distributed Systems SC23-9768-03 IBM Tioli Monitoring Version 6.2.3 Fix Pack 1 High Aailability Guide for Distributed Systems SC23-9768-03

More information

Tivoli Business Systems Manager

Tivoli Business Systems Manager Tioli Business Systems Manager Version 3.1 Introducing the Consoles SC32-9086-00 Tioli Business Systems Manager Version 3.1 Introducing the Consoles SC32-9086-00 Note Before using this information and

More information

IBM. Basic system operations. System i. Version 6 Release 1

IBM. Basic system operations. System i. Version 6 Release 1 IBM System i Basic system operations Version 6 Release 1 IBM System i Basic system operations Version 6 Release 1 Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in

More information

IBM Tivoli Composite Application Manager for Microsoft Applications: Microsoft Active Directory Agent Fix Pack 13.

IBM Tivoli Composite Application Manager for Microsoft Applications: Microsoft Active Directory Agent Fix Pack 13. IBM Tioli Composite Application Manager for Microsoft Applications: Microsoft Actie Directory Agent 6.3.1 Fix Pack 13 Reference IBM IBM Tioli Composite Application Manager for Microsoft Applications:

More information

IBM Tivoli Netcool Performance Manager Wireline Component Document Revision R2E2. Performance Guidelines IBM

IBM Tivoli Netcool Performance Manager Wireline Component Document Revision R2E2. Performance Guidelines IBM IBM Tivoli Netcool Performance Manager 1.4.1 Wireline Component Document Revision R2E2 Performance Guidelines IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in

More information

Internet Information Server User s Guide

Internet Information Server User s Guide IBM Tioli Monitoring for Web Infrastructure Internet Information Serer User s Guide Version 5.1.0 SH19-4573-00 IBM Tioli Monitoring for Web Infrastructure Internet Information Serer User s Guide Version

More information

Installation Guide 1.3.1

Installation Guide 1.3.1 Tioli Netcool Performance Manager 1.3.1 Wireline Component Document Reision R1E10 Installation Guide 1.3.1 Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices

More information

IBM Network Performance Insight 1.3 Document Revision R2E1. Network Performance Insight Overview IBM

IBM Network Performance Insight 1.3 Document Revision R2E1. Network Performance Insight Overview IBM IBM Network Performance Insight 1.3 Document Reision R2E1 Network Performance Insight Oeriew IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page

More information

IBM Cognos Dynamic Query Analyzer Version Installation and Configuration Guide IBM

IBM Cognos Dynamic Query Analyzer Version Installation and Configuration Guide IBM IBM Cognos Dynamic Query Analyzer Version 11.0.0 Installation and Configuration Guide IBM Product Information This document applies to IBM Cognos Analytics ersion 11.0.0 and may also apply to subsequent

More information

Common Server Administration Guide

Common Server Administration Guide Content Manager OnDemand for i Version 7 Release 2 Common Serer Administration Guide SC19-2792-01 Content Manager OnDemand for i Version 7 Release 2 Common Serer Administration Guide SC19-2792-01 Note

More information

High Availability Guide for Distributed Systems

High Availability Guide for Distributed Systems IBM Tioli Monitoring Version 6.3.0 High Aailability Guide for Distributed Systems SC22-5455-00 IBM Tioli Monitoring Version 6.3.0 High Aailability Guide for Distributed Systems SC22-5455-00 Note Before

More information

IBM InfoSphere MDM Enterprise Viewer User's Guide

IBM InfoSphere MDM Enterprise Viewer User's Guide IBM InfoSphere Master Data Management Version 11 IBM InfoSphere MDM Enterprise Viewer User's Guide GI13-2661-00 IBM InfoSphere Master Data Management Version 11 IBM InfoSphere MDM Enterprise Viewer User's

More information

IBM InfoSphere Information Server Integration Guide for IBM InfoSphere DataStage Pack for SAP BW

IBM InfoSphere Information Server Integration Guide for IBM InfoSphere DataStage Pack for SAP BW IBM InfoSphere Information Serer Version 11 Release 3 IBM InfoSphere Information Serer Integration Guide for IBM InfoSphere DataStage Pack for SAP BW SC19-4314-00 IBM InfoSphere Information Serer Version

More information

Advanced Application Reporting USER GUIDE

Advanced Application Reporting USER GUIDE Advanced Application Reporting USER GUIDE CONTENTS 1.0 Preface: About This Document 5 2.0 Conventions 5 3.0 Chapter 1: Introducing Advanced Application Reporting 6 4.0 Features and Benefits 7 5.0 Product

More information

IBM. Installing, configuring, using, and troubleshooting. IBM Operations Analytics for z Systems. Version 3 Release 1

IBM. Installing, configuring, using, and troubleshooting. IBM Operations Analytics for z Systems. Version 3 Release 1 IBM Operations Analytics for z Systems IBM Installing, configuring, using, and troubleshooting Version 3 Release 1 IBM Operations Analytics for z Systems IBM Installing, configuring, using, and troubleshooting

More information

IBM i Version 7.2. Service and support IBM

IBM i Version 7.2. Service and support IBM IBM i Version 7.2 Serice and support IBM IBM i Version 7.2 Serice and support IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 71. This document

More information

IBM Unica Detect Version 8 Release 5 October 26, Administrator's Guide

IBM Unica Detect Version 8 Release 5 October 26, Administrator's Guide IBM Unica Detect Version 8 Release 5 October 26, 2011 Administrator's Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 175. This edition applies

More information

iplanetwebserveruser sguide

iplanetwebserveruser sguide IBM Tioli Monitoring for Web Infrastructure iplanetwebsereruser sguide Version 5.1.0 SH19-4574-00 IBM Tioli Monitoring for Web Infrastructure iplanetwebsereruser sguide Version 5.1.0 SH19-4574-00 Note

More information

IBM Security QRadar Version Tuning Guide IBM

IBM Security QRadar Version Tuning Guide IBM IBM Security QRadar Version 7.3.1 Tuning Guide IBM Note Before you use this information and the product that it supports, read the information in Notices on page 25. Product information This document applies

More information

Warehouse Summarization and Pruning Agent Version Fix Pack 1. User's Guide SC

Warehouse Summarization and Pruning Agent Version Fix Pack 1. User's Guide SC Warehouse Summarization and Pruning Agent Version 6.2.3 Fix Pack 1 User's Guide SC23-9767-02 Warehouse Summarization and Pruning Agent Version 6.2.3 Fix Pack 1 User's Guide SC23-9767-02 Note Before using

More information

IBM i Version 7.3. Networking TCP/IP troubleshooting IBM

IBM i Version 7.3. Networking TCP/IP troubleshooting IBM IBM i Version 7.3 Networking TCP/IP troubleshooting IBM IBM i Version 7.3 Networking TCP/IP troubleshooting IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in

More information

Managing Cisco QoS Using ehealth

Managing Cisco QoS Using ehealth Focus Topic January 2006 Managing Cisco QoS Using ehealth Quality of Service (QoS) is a measure of performance that allows you to configure different levels of service for various types of traffic in your

More information

IBM Initiate Web Reports. User's Guide. Version9Release7 SC

IBM Initiate Web Reports. User's Guide. Version9Release7 SC IBM Initiate Web Reports User's Guide Version9Release7 SC19-3142-04 IBM Initiate Web Reports User's Guide Version9Release7 SC19-3142-04 Note Before using this information and the product that it supports,

More information

Administrator's Guide

Administrator's Guide IBM Tioli Storage Productiity Center Version 5.2.4 Administrator's Guide SC27-4859-03 Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 285. This

More information

IBM Tivoli Monitoring for Messaging and Collaboration: Lotus Domino. User s Guide. Version SC

IBM Tivoli Monitoring for Messaging and Collaboration: Lotus Domino. User s Guide. Version SC IBM Tioli Monitoring for Messaging and Collaboration: Lotus Domino User s Guide Version 5.1.0 SC32-0841-00 IBM Tioli Monitoring for Messaging and Collaboration: Lotus Domino User s Guide Version 5.1.0

More information

Guide to Managing Common Metadata

Guide to Managing Common Metadata IBM InfoSphere Information Serer Version 11 Release 3 Guide to Managing Common Metadata SC19-4297-01 IBM InfoSphere Information Serer Version 11 Release 3 Guide to Managing Common Metadata SC19-4297-01

More information

IBM Interact Version 9 Release 0 May 31, User's Guide

IBM Interact Version 9 Release 0 May 31, User's Guide IBM Interact Version 9 Release 0 May 31, 2013 User's Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 97. This edition applies to ersion 9,

More information

IBM Kenexa LCMS Premier Version 9.4. User's Guide August 2015 IBM

IBM Kenexa LCMS Premier Version 9.4. User's Guide August 2015 IBM IBM Kenexa LCMS Premier Version 9.4 User's Guide August 2015 IBM IBM Kenexa LCMS Premier Version 9.4 User's Guide August 2015 IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the

More information

IBM BigFix Inventory Version 9.5. Scalability Guide. Version 2 IBM

IBM BigFix Inventory Version 9.5. Scalability Guide. Version 2 IBM IBM BigFix Inentory Version 9.5 Scalability Guide Version 2 IBM IBM BigFix Inentory Version 9.5 Scalability Guide Version 2 IBM Scalability Guide This edition applies to ersion 9.5 of IBM BigFix Inentory

More information

Installation and Setup Guide

Installation and Setup Guide IBM Tioli Monitoring for Business Integration Installation and Setup Guide Version 5.1.1 SC32-1402-00 IBM Tioli Monitoring for Business Integration Installation and Setup Guide Version 5.1.1 SC32-1402-00

More information

IBM Security Access Manager for Web Version 7.0. Installation Guide GC

IBM Security Access Manager for Web Version 7.0. Installation Guide GC IBM Security Access Manager for Web Version 7.0 Installation Guide GC23-6502-02 IBM Security Access Manager for Web Version 7.0 Installation Guide GC23-6502-02 Note Before using this information and the

More information

LotusLive. LotusLive Engage and LotusLive Connections User's Guide

LotusLive. LotusLive Engage and LotusLive Connections User's Guide LotusLie LotusLie Engage and LotusLie Connections User's Guide LotusLie LotusLie Engage and LotusLie Connections User's Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information

More information

Extended Search Administration

Extended Search Administration IBM Extended Search Extended Search Administration Version 3 Release 7 SC27-1404-00 IBM Extended Search Extended Search Administration Version 3 Release 7 SC27-1404-00 Note! Before using this information

More information

IBM Features on Demand. User's Guide

IBM Features on Demand. User's Guide IBM Features on Demand User's Guide IBM Features on Demand User's Guide Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix B, Notices, on page 55.

More information

IBM Sterling Gentran:Server for Windows. Installation Guide. Version 5.3.1

IBM Sterling Gentran:Server for Windows. Installation Guide. Version 5.3.1 IBM Sterling Gentran:Serer for Windows Installation Guide Version 5.3.1 IBM Sterling Gentran:Serer for Windows Installation Guide Version 5.3.1 Note Before using this information and the product it supports,

More information

Installing and Configuring Tivoli Enterprise Data Warehouse

Installing and Configuring Tivoli Enterprise Data Warehouse Installing and Configuring Tioli Enterprise Data Warehouse Version 1 Release 1 GC32-0744-00 Installing and Configuring Tioli Enterprise Data Warehouse Version 1 Release 1 GC32-0744-00 Installing and Configuring

More information

Tivoli Application Dependency Discovery Manager Version 7 Release 2.1. Installation Guide

Tivoli Application Dependency Discovery Manager Version 7 Release 2.1. Installation Guide Tioli Application Dependency Discoery Manager Version 7 Release 2.1 Installation Guide Tioli Application Dependency Discoery Manager Version 7 Release 2.1 Installation Guide Note Before using this information

More information

Tivoli Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator

Tivoli Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Tioli Tioli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Version 2.1 Installation Guide for Windows GC32-1604-00 Tioli Tioli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Version 2.1 Installation Guide for Windows GC32-1604-00

More information

User s Guide GC

User s Guide GC Tioli IBM Tioli Monitoring for Databases: Sybase ASE 5.1.2 User s Guide GC32-9136-00 Tioli IBM Tioli Monitoring for Databases: Sybase ASE 5.1.2 User s Guide GC32-9136-00 Note Before using this information

More information

Live Partition Mobility ESCALA REFERENCE 86 A1 85FA 01

Live Partition Mobility ESCALA REFERENCE 86 A1 85FA 01 Lie Partition Mobility ESCALA REFERENCE 86 A1 85FA 01 ESCALA Lie Partition Mobility Hardware May 2009 BULL CEDOC 357 AVENUE PATTON B.P.20845 49008 ANGERS CEDE 01 FRANCE REFERENCE 86 A1 85FA 01 The following

More information

IBM XIV Storage System Management Tools Version 4.5. Operations Guide SC

IBM XIV Storage System Management Tools Version 4.5. Operations Guide SC IBM XIV Storage System Management Tools Version 4.5 Operations Guide SC27-5986-03 Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 73. Edition Notice

More information

Tivoli Application Dependency Discovery Manager Version 7.3. Installation Guide IBM

Tivoli Application Dependency Discovery Manager Version 7.3. Installation Guide IBM Tioli Application Dependency Discoery Manager Version 7.3 Installation Guide IBM Tioli Application Dependency Discoery Manager Version 7.3 Installation Guide IBM Note Before using this information and

More information

IBM Universal Behavior Exchange Toolkit Release June 24, User's Guide IBM

IBM Universal Behavior Exchange Toolkit Release June 24, User's Guide IBM IBM Uniersal Behaior Exchange Toolkit Release 16.2.6 June 24, 2016 User's Guide IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 37. This document

More information

HPE Intelligent Management Center

HPE Intelligent Management Center HPE Intelligent Management Center Service Health Manager Administrator Guide Abstract This guide provides introductory, configuration, and usage information for Service Health Manager (SHM). It is for

More information

Tivoli Tivoli Provisioning Manager

Tivoli Tivoli Provisioning Manager Tioli Tioli Proisioning Manager Version 2.1 Installation Guide for Linux on Intel and Linux on iseries GC32-1616-00 Tioli Tioli Proisioning Manager Version 2.1 Installation Guide for Linux on Intel and

More information

Authorization C API Developer Reference

Authorization C API Developer Reference IBM Security Access Manager for Web Version 7.0 Authorization C API Deeloper Reference SC23-6515-02 IBM Security Access Manager for Web Version 7.0 Authorization C API Deeloper Reference SC23-6515-02

More information

IBM. Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Windows: Installation and setup. IBM i 7.1

IBM. Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Windows: Installation and setup. IBM i 7.1 IBM IBM i Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Windows: Installation and setup 7.1 IBM IBM i Connecting to IBM i IBM i Access for Windows: Installation and setup 7.1 Note Before using this information

More information

IBM SPSS Forecasting 24 IBM

IBM SPSS Forecasting 24 IBM IBM SPSS Forecasting 24 IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 59. Product Information This edition applies to ersion 24, release 0,

More information